Democracy Spraffa

Agenda Document Pack - Economic Development and Infrastructure Services Committee - 16/06/2026

Moray Council · 16 June 2026
Back to Economic Development and Infrastructure Services Committee — 16 June 2026 and its agenda

Text extracted from the council's PDF. Layout and reading order may differ from the original.

Original council PDF · Download plain text

Some pages contain no extractable text. They may be blank, graphics or scanned pages. OCR has not been applied.

Page 1

Economic Development and Infrastructure Services
Committee 
Tuesday, 16 June 2026 
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that a Meeting of the Economic Development and
Infrastructure Services Committee is to be held at Council Chambers, Council
Office, High Street, Elgin, IV30 1BX on Tuesday, 16 June 2026 at 09:30. 
BUSINESS 
1. Sederunt 
2. Declaration of Group Decisions and Members Interests * 
3. Resolution
Consider, and if so decide, adopt the following resolution:
"That under Section 50A (4) and (5) of the Local Government (Scotland)
Act 1973, as amended, the public and media representatives be excluded
from the meeting for Item 13 of business on the grounds that it involves
the likely disclosure of exempt information of the class described in the
relevant Paragraphs of Part 1 of Schedule 7A of the Act.”   
4. Minute of meeting dated 10 March 2026   7 - 14
5. Written Questions ** 
6. New Fee within the Burial Service
Report by  Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations  
15 - 26
7. 2025-28 Growth, Planning and Climate and Operations and
Environment Service Plans (Year 2 refresh)
Report by Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations  
27 - 50
Page 1

Page 2

8. External Grant Funding Updates
Report by  Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations  
51 - 80
9. Tourism Strategy for Moray
Report by  Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations  
81 -
118
10. Operations and Environment and Growth, Planning and
Climate Capital and Revenue Budget Monitoring to 31
March 2026
Report by  Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations  
119 -
134
11. Performance Report (Growth, Planning and Climate) –
Period to March 2026
Report by  Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations  
135 -
144
12. Performance Report (Operations and Environment) – Period
to March 2026
Report by Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations  
145 -
154 
Item(s) which the Committee may wish to consider with the
Press and Public excluded   
13. Smarter Working Project Phase 3 – Project Closure [Para 1]
• 1. Information relating to a particular employee, former employee
or applicant to become an employee of, or a particular office-
holder, former office-holder or applicant to become an office-
holder under, the authority. 
Information Reports - Not for Discussion at this Meeting
Any member wishing to call in a noting or information report from one
meeting shall give notice to Committee Services by 12 noon 2 clear
working days before the meeting for which the report is
published.  Please see Standing Order 38 for deadlines. The Notice
shall be countersigned by one other elected member and shall explain
the reason for call in including any action sought.   
Page 2

Page 3

Information Report - Goods Vehicle Operator’s Licence –
Statutory Obligations and Proposed Policy Position
Report by  Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations  
155 -
168 
Information Report - Climate Adaptation Benchmarking
2025
Report by  Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations  
169 -
206 
Information Report - List of Property Transactions
Concluded Under Delegated Powers
Report by  Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations  
207 -
216 
Summary of Economic Development and Infrastructure
Services Committee functions:
Roads Authority; Lighting Authority, Reservoirs Act 1975, Public
Passenger Transport; Flood Prevention; Twinning; Piers and Harbours and
Coast Protection; Industrial and Commercial Development;
Environmental Protection; Burial Grounds; Assistance to Industry or
Commerce; Public Conveniences; Council Transportation; Catering &
Cleaning; Land Reform (Scotland) Act 2003; Countryside Amenities;
Tourism, monitoring funding from European Programmes, youth training
and employment creation scheme and provide Architectural, Quantity
Surveying, Maintenance and Allied Property Services.     
Watching the Meeting
You can watch the webcast live by going to:    
http://www.moray.gov.uk/moray_standard/page_43661.html    
Webcasts are available to view for 1 year following the meeting.  
You can also attend the meeting in person.  If you wish to attend
in person, please come to the High Street entrance door and a
member of staff will let you into the Chamber. 
Page 3

Page 4

GUIDANCE NOTES 
* Declaration of Group Decisions and Members Interests - The Chair of the
meeting shall seek declarations from any individual or political group at the
beginning of a meeting whether any prior decision has been reached on how the
individual or members of the group will vote on any item(s) of business on the
Agenda, and if so on which item(s).  A prior decision shall be one that the
individual or the group deems to be mandatory on the individual or the group
members such that the individual or the group members will be subject to
sanctions should they not vote in accordance with the prior decision.  Any such
prior decisions will be recorded in the Minute of the meeting. 
** Written Questions - Any Member can put one written question about any relevant
and competent business within the specified remits not already on the agenda, to
the Chair provided it is received by the Proper Officer or Committee Services by
5pm three working days prior to the day of the meeting, please see Standing Order
36 for deadlines.  A copy of any written answer provided by the Chair will be
published on the Council’s committee management system by 12pm the day
before the meeting.  The Member who has put the question may, after the answer
has been published, may ask one supplementary question directly related to the
subject matter at the meeting, but no discussion will be allowed. 
No supplementary question can be put or answered more than 10 minutes after
the Council has started on the relevant item of business, except with the consent
of the Chair. If a Member does not have the opportunity to put a supplementary
question because no time remains, then he or she can submit it in writing to the
Proper Officer who will arrange for a written answer to be provided within 7
working days. 
Page 4

Page 5

MORAY COUNCIL 
Economic Development and Infrastructure Services
Committee 
SEDERUNT 
Councillor Marc Macrae (Chair)
Councillor Amber Dunbar (Depute Chair)  
Councillor Peter Bloomfield (Member)
Councillor Neil Cameron (Member)
Councillor Tracy Colyer (Member)
Councillor John Cowe (Member)
Councillor John Divers (Member)
Councillor Jérémie Fernandes (Member)
Councillor David Gordon (Member)
Councillor Juli Harris (Member)
Councillor Sandy Keith (Member)
Councillor Paul McBain (Member)
Councillor Draeyk Van Der Horn (Member)
Councillor Sonya Warren (Member)  
Clerk Name: Lissa Rowan
Clerk Telephone: 07765 741754
Clerk Email: committee.services@moray.gov.uk 
Page 5

Page 6

Page 6

Page 7

MORAY COUNCIL 
Minute of Meeting of the Economic Development and Infrastructure Services
Committee 
Tuesday, 10 March 2026 
Council Chambers, Council Office, High Street, Elgin, IV30 1BX 
PRESENT 
Councillor Peter Bloomfield, Councillor Neil Cameron, Councillor Tracy Colyer,
Councillor John Cowe, Councillor John Divers, Councillor Amber Dunbar, Councillor
Jérémie Fernandes, Councillor David Gordon, Councillor Juli Harris, Councillor Sandy
Keith, Councillor Marc Macrae, Councillor Draeyk van der Horn, Councillor Sonya
Warren 
ALSO PRESENT 
Councillor Kathleen Robertson (agenda items 10-16) 
APOLOGIES 
Councillor Paul McBain 
IN ATTENDANCE 
Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations; Head of Operations and
Environment; Head of Growth, Planning and Climate (Chief Planning Officer); Head of
Housing, Properties and Communities; Service Manager Roads and Fleet; Service
Manager Transportation; Service Manager Environmental Services; Service Manager
Design Consultancy; Service Manager Property, Estates and Assets; K McGowan,
Senior Engineer (Structures); W Burnish, Senior Engineer (Flood Risk Management); J
Burnett, Development Officer; L Ross, Development Project Officer; Service Manager
Legal Services; and L Rowan, Committee Services Officer   
1         Chair 
Councillor Marc Macrae chaired the meeting.    
2         Declaration of Group Decisions and Members Interests 
In terms of Standing Orders 21 and 23 of the Councillors’ Code of Conduct, there
were no declarations from Group Leaders or Spokespersons regarding any prior
decisions taken on how Members will vote on any item on the agenda or any
declarations of Member’s interests in respect of any item on the agenda.    
Item 4.
Page 7

Page 8

3         Resolution 
The meeting resolved that under Section 50A (4) and (5) of the Local Government
(Scotland) Act 1973, as amended, the public and media representatives be excluded
from the meeting for the following item of business on the grounds that it involves the
likely disclosure of exempt information of the class described in relevant Paragraphs
of Part 1 of Schedule 7A of the Act. 
Paragraph Number of Minute  Paragraph Number of Schedule 7a and Reason 
18b  Para 9 - Any terms proposed or to be proposed by
or to the authority in the course of negotiations for
a contract for the acquisition or disposal of
property or the supply of goods or services. 
4         Minute of meeting dated 11 November 2025 
The Minute of the meeting of the Economic Development and Infrastructure Services
Committee dated 11 November 2025 was submitted and approved. 
5         Written Questions 
The Committee noted that no written questions had been submitted. 
6         Roads Asset Management Planning 
Under reference to paragraph 12 of the Minute of the meeting of Moray Council dated
4 December 2024, the meeting had before it a report by the Executive Director
Economy, Enterprise and Operations informing the Committee of the latest road
condition and Roads Asset Management Planning information.  
Following consideration, the Committee unanimously agreed:  
(i) to note the latest Road Condition Indicator (RCI) results for Moray Council; 
(ii) that the RCI results continue to be monitored and reported back on an annual
basis to this committee; and 
(iii) to note the clear commitment to the use of Road Asset Management Planning in
Moray Council   
7         Update on Burial and Cremation (Scotland) Act 2016 - Exclusive right of
burial and headstone inspections 
Under reference to paragraph 12 of the Minute of the meeting of this Committee
dated 29 April 2025, the meeting had before it a report by the Executive Director
Page 8

Page 9

Economy, Enterprise and Operations updating the Committee of the statutory
requirements on the Council, as a burial authority, in line with the Burial and
Cremations (Scotland) Act 2016.  
Following consideration, the Committee unanimously agreed to note:  
(i) the regulatory changes effective from the 1 March 2026 regarding the exclusive
right of burial as detailed in section 4.1 of the report; 
(ii) and approve the Headstone Inspection Policy as detailed in Appendix 1 to the
report; recognising that a further update to the policy will be presented to
committee for approval once the changes regarding headstone inspections have
been embedded within the burial service; and 
(iii) that a headstone inspection team will be created to meet the Council’s statutory
obligations with regards headstone inspections.   
8         Non Network Bridge Prioritisation 
The meeting had before it a report by the Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and
Operations seeking approval of the proposed Council Policy relating to prioritisation
of non-network bridge maintenance works.  
Following consideration, the Committee unanimously agreed to endorse the
proposed Council Policy as set out in paragraphs 4.1-4.7 of the report in relation to
prioritisation of Non-Network Bridge maintenance works.    
9         Roads Maintenance Revenue and Capital Budgets 2026-27 
Under reference to paragraph 9 of the Minute of the meeting of Moray Council dated
22 October 2024, the meeting had before it a report by the Executive Director
Economy, Enterprise and Operations seeking approval of plans for the expenditure of
funds allocated from the 2026/27 Revenue and Capital Budgets for Roads
Maintenance.  
Following consideration, the Committee unanimously agreed to:  
(i) approve the allocation of funds, from the Revenue and Capital Budget 2026/27,
to Roads Maintenance activities, as outlined in Appendix A of this report; 
(ii) grant delegated authority to the Service Manager Roads and Fleet to proceed with
necessary roads maintenance works whilst noting that the Service Manager will,
as soon as possible, publish a list of schemes which can be funded from the
budget provision recommended in this report; and 
(iii) note that the list of schemes will be drawn up in accordance with the principles
and objectives detailed in this report, in the Roads Asset Management Plan and in
the Capital Plan.   
Page 9

Page 10

10         Flood Risk Management and Bridges Capital and Revenue Budgets 
Under reference to paragraph 11 of the Minute of the meeting of this Committee
dated 29 April 2025, the meeting had before it a report by the Executive Director
Economy, Enterprise and Operations seeking approval of the proposed 2026/27
Capital and Revenue programme of work for Flood Risk Management and Bridge
Maintenance. 
Following consideration, the Committee unanimously agreed: 
(i) the Flood Risk Management Schedule of Clearance and Repair for 2026/27; 
(ii) the programme of Bridge Maintenance works for 2026/27; and 
(iii) to delegate authority to the Head of Environmental and Commercial Services
to bid for grant funding that is made available throughout the year. 
11         Transportation Capital and Revenue Budgets 
Councillor Robertson joined the meeting at this juncture. 
The meeting had before it a report by the Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and
Operations seeking approval of plans to deliver the capital and revenue programme in
Transportation in 2026/27.  
During his introduction, the Service Manager Transportation advised of an error at
paragraph 5.3 of the report which should read "Following changes to transport
entitlement from 2 miles to 3 miles for secondary school pupils". This was noted.  
Following consideration, the Committee unanimously agreed to:  
(i) approve the plans to deliver the capital and revenue programme for 2026/27 as
contained in this report; 
(ii) delegate authority to the Head of Environment and Operations to apply for grants
for the funding areas set out at para 5.21 of the report; and 
(iii) note the revision at paragraph 5.3 to read "Following changes to transport
entitlement from 2 miles to 3 miles for secondary school pupils". 
12         Environmental Protection Capital and Revenue Budgets 
The meeting had before it a report by the Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and
Operations seeking approval of the plans to deliver the capital and revenue
programme in Environmental Protection in 2026/27.  
Following consideration, the Committee unanimously agreed to:  
Page 10

Page 11

(i) approve the plans to deliver the capital programme for 2026/27 as set out in the
report; 
(ii) grant delegated authority to the Service Manager Environmental Services to
proceed with necessary maintenance works and prioritise the works in
accordance with any budgetary restrictions; 
(iii) delegate authority to the Head of Operations and Environment to apply for grants
in support of the areas of work identified in section 5 of the report.   
13         Operations and Environment and Growth, Planning and Climate Capital
and Revenue Budget Monitoring to 31 December 2025 
Under reference to paragraph 3 of the Minute of the meeting of Moray Council dated
26 February 2025, the meeting had before it a report by the Executive Director
Economy, Enterprise and Operations asking the Committee to scrutinise and note the
quarter three position of 2025/26 regarding Operations and Environment and Growth,
Planning and Climate Revenue and Capital budgets.  
Following consideration, the Committee unanimously agreed to note the quarter
three budget position for 2025/2026.    
14         Routemap to Net Zero and Climate Change Update 2024-2025 
Under reference to paragraph 12 of the Minute of the meeting of Moray Council dated
24 September 2025, the meeting had before it a report by the Executive Director
Economy, Enterprise and Operations asking the Committee to consider and approve
the 2024/25 Routemap to Net Zero and Climate Change Update which provided
insight into current performance, identified key barriers to progress, and outlined next
steps necessary to keep the Council on a viable pathway to net zero.  
Following consideration, the Committee welcomed the over 7% reduction in
recorded emissions since 2023-24 and thereafter unanimously agreed to:  
(i) approve the annual Climate Change Plan and Routemap to Net Zero update, as
set out in Appendix 1 and 2 of the report; and 
(ii) note that a final version of the Council’s Climate Change Strategy is planned to
be presented to Council in May 2026, outlining a way forward with consideration
to the issues raised in the report.   
15         Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategy (LHEES) Update 2026 
Under reference to paragraph 13 of the Minute of the meeting of Moray Council dated
14 August 2024, the meeting had before it a report by the Executive Director
Economy, Enterprise and Operations asking the Committee to consider and approve
the Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategy (LHEES) Update 2026 which provided
insight into current performance, identified changes in the delivery plan, and outlined
Page 11

Page 12

next steps necessary for decarbonising heat in buildings and improving energy
efficiency across Moray within current budgets.  
The Committee joined the Chair in commending key stakeholders integral to
progressing decarbonisation of heating and energy efficiency in Moray, namely the
Strategic Planning and Development Service, Housing and Property Service, Elected
Members, Business Gateway Moray, Moray Local Employability Partnership, Moray
CAN, NHS Grampian, UHI Moray and SSEN and thereafter unanimously agreed to:  
(i) approve the LHEES Update 2026, as set out in Appendix 1, and the changes to the
delivery plan as proposed in Appendix 2 of the report; and 
(ii) note that while work will progress on the LHEES, many aspects of the Delivery
Plan cannot be met without external resources.   
16         Tourism Strategy for Moray 
The meeting had before it a report by the Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and
Operations which presented the draft “Moray Tourism 2036 – Our Ten-Year Strategy”
and sought approval to undertake a 6-week public consultation, alongside partner
feedback from the Moray Economic Partnership (MEP). 
Following consideration, the Committee unanimously agreed:  
(i) to note the draft Moray Tourism 2036 – Our Ten-Year Strategy; 
(ii) that the draft Strategy proceed to a 6-week public consultation via Moray Engage; 
(iii) to note that the draft Strategy will also be considered by the Moray Economic
Partnership (MEP) both before the consultation period and in nearly final format
subsequent to the consultation period; and 
(iv) that a final Strategy, reflecting all consultation and partner feedback, will be
reported back to this Committee for approval in June.   
17 Suspension of Standing Orders 
The Chair sought the agreement of the Committee to suspend Standing Order 75 to
allow the meeting to continue beyond 12:45 pm. This was agreed. 
18 Information Reports – if called in 
The Chair stated that two information reports had been called in. 
18a)         Information Report - Development of the Moray Film Liaison Service 
Councillor Keith left the meeting at this juncture. 
Page 12

Page 13

The meeting had before it an Information Report by the Executive Director Economy,
Enterprise and Operations which informed the Committee of the ongoing
development of the Moray Film Liaison Service and outlined potential opportunities
for future service enhancement and income generation using Council-managed
assets. 
The report had been called in by Councillor Cameron, seconded by Councillor
Warren as the report raised several policy questions in relation to income
generation, economic impact measurement, and the future structure of the service. 
Cllr Cameron welcomed the report but was of the view that further detail was
required. He highlighted the need for a dedicated Moray Film Liaison service to
support delivery of the Tourism Strategy which had been considered earlier in the
meeting and moved that Officers bring a report to a future meeting of the committee
outlining: 
• the economic impact of filming activity in Moray using the Screen Scotland
methodology;
• opportunities to promote Moray more proactively as a filming location,
including its coastal towns, harbours, and rural landscapes;
• potential income generation from the use of Council assets such as harbours,
roads, open spaces, and land; and
• whether a more structured film liaison service would support economic
growth in Moray. 
Councillor Warren seconded this. 
The Service Manager Legal Services sought a brief adjournment to consider
Councillor Cameron’s motion. This was agreed. 
On resumption of the meeting, the Service Manager Legal Services advised that the
report did not contain enough information for Members to agree the terms of
Councillor Cameron’s motion however reminded Members that the Executive
Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations had advised that a detailed report on
the Film Liaison Service was planned for a future meeting of the Committee for full
consideration once the outcome of the consultation on the Tourism Strategy was
known and that this report would be on the main agenda and cover the points raised
by Councillor Cameron. 
After considering the advice from the Service Manager Legal Services, Councillor
Cameron withdrew his motion. 
Thereafter, the Committee unanimously agreed to note: 
(i) the report; and 
(ii) that a more detailed report on the Film Liaison Service would be brought to a
future meeting of the Committee for full consideration once the outcome of
the consultation on the Tourism Strategy is known. 
Page 13

Page 14

18b         Information Report - List of Property Transactions Concluded Under
Delegated Powers [Para 9] 
Councillor Robertson left the meeting at this juncture. 
The meeting had before it an Information Report by the Executive Director Education,
Housing and Communities informing the Committee of property transactions which
have been dealt with under delegated powers. 
The report was called in by Councillor Cameron, seconded by Councillor Warren to
seek clarification from officers on a number of points relating to the operation of
delegated powers and the valuation approach used for property transactions. 
Following consideration, the Committee unanimously agreed to note the report. 
Page 14

Page 15

Report to: Economic Development
and Infrastructure
Services Committee
Meeting Date: 16 June 2026
Report by: Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations
Author: Paul  Wolverson Contact Email: paul.wolverson@moray.gov.uk
Subject: New Fee within the Burial Service
1. PURPOSE
☒ For Decision      ☐  For Information
1.1  The purpose of this report is to ask committee to homologate the decision made by the
Chief Executive using their delegated powers to introduce a fee for a test dig within the
burial service.   
1.2  This report is submitted to Committee in terms of Section III (F) (14) of the Council’s
Scheme of Administration relating to providing and maintaining all burial grounds and
Section III (B) (1) and (30) of the Council's Scheme of Administration relating to financial
policy and the setting of charges.
2. SUMMARY
2.1 The Council approved its burial services fees and charges for 2026/27 on 28 January 2026
(paragraph 8 of the Minute refers).  The fees and charges did not include a cost for
undertaking a test dig to establish remaining lair capacity.  
2.2 A number of other Scottish Authorities already provide the cost of a test dig within their
fees and charges. 
2.3 Requests for a test dig have recently been received from lair owners.  To expedite the
introduction of a charge, the costs have been calculated and approved by the Chief
Executive using their delegated powers in terms of Section 5 (7) of the Council’s Scheme
of Delegation.
2.4 The purpose of this report is to seek homologation of the delegated decision made by the
Chief Executive.
Item 6.
Page 15

Page 16

3. RECOMMENDATIONS
3.1  Committee is asked to homologate the decision made by the Chief Executive using
their delegated powers to introduce a fee of £392 for a test dig within burial services.
Paul Wolverson
Service Manager Environmental Services
4. BACKGROUND AND CONTEXT
4.1  The Council approved its burial services fees and charges for 2026/27 on 28 January 2026
(para 8 of the minute refers).
4.2  Following the approval of the fees and charges, enquiries were received from lair owners
to undertake a test dig on their lairs to establish the existing capacity within the lair. 
Establishing the remaining capacity can assist with the future planning of interments.  The
fees and charges approved on the 28 January 2026 did not include a cost for undertaking a
test dig.  Investigations have shown that a number of other Scottish Local Authorities
provide a chargeable service for a test dig.     
5. PROPOSALS
5.1  Following the enquiries, the costs for undertaking a test dig were calculated based on a
cost recovery model.  The costs were calculated to be £392.  The costs include the time
taken to undertake a test dig, as well as the administration costs for managing and
processing the request.
5.2  To avoid delaying the offer of a test dig, the cost and introduction of a fee was approved by
the Chief Executive using their delegated powers.  The provision of a test dig is now
included as part of the burials service fees and charges for 2026/27.  Moving forwards the
charge will be included within the annual fees and charges process.   
5.3 This report seeks homologation of the decision made by the Chief Executive using their
delegated powers.
5.4 The administration process for managing a test dig has been embedded in the burial
service, this process includes that before any test dig is undertaken, those requesting it
must demonstrate that they are the lair owner and have the exclusive right of burial for the
lair.
6. SUMMARY OF IMPLICATIONS
6.1 The table below shows whether risks and implications apply if the recommendations are
agreed:
SUBJECT YES NO
Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcome Improvement Plan) X
Policy and Legal X
Financial X
Page 16

Page 17

Risk X
Staffing X
Best Value and Transformation X
Property X
Information Communications Technology/Digital   X
Equalities. Social Inclusion and Economic Impact   X
Climate Change and Biodiversity Impact X
6.2  Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcomes Improvement Plan (LOIP))
Improved Collaborative Leadership, as part of continuous improvement through Best
Value, will better enable the Council to fulfil the ambitions set out in its strategic plans.
a) Links to Council Corporate Plan – The proposals in this report support and contribute
to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following Council Plan
strategic priorities:
☐ Tackle Poverty and Inequality.
☐ Build Stronger Greener Vibrant Economy.
☐ Build Thriving, resilient, empowered Communities.
b) Links to Local Outcomes Improvement Plan – The proposals in this report support
and contribute to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following
Local Outcomes Improvement Plan priorities:
☐ Developing a diverse, inclusive, and sustainable economy
☐ Building a better future for our children and young people in   Moray.
☐ Empowering and connecting communities.
☐ Improving wellbeing of our population
6.3  Policy and Legal
The cost has been based on a cost recovery model in line with the Councils current policy
relating to burial services.
There are no legal implications arising from this report. 
6.4  Financial
Income from additional charges will contribute to the Council’s financial sustainability.
One off Costs:
Service
Area
Budget Budget
Years
Proposed
Spend this
Year
Virement
From
Other
Comments
Annually Recurring Costs:
Service
Area
Budget With
Effect
From
Annual
Net
Impact
Virement
From (if
applicable)
Other
Comments
Page 17

Page 18

6.5 Risk
There are no risk implications arising directly from this report.
6.6 Staffing
There are no staffing implications arising from this report.
6.7 Best Value and Transformation
There are no best value and transformation implications arising from this report.
6.8 Property
There are no property implications arising from this report.
6.9 Information Communications/Technology/Digital
There are no implications arising from this report.
6.10 Equalities, Social Inclusion and Economic Impact
There are no equalities implications or implications for the socio-economic duty arising
from this report.
6.11 Climate Change and Biodiversity Impacts
There are no implications for climate change or biodiversity arising from this report.
7. CONSULTATION
7.1 This report has been prepared in consultation with Executive Director Economy, Enterprise
and Operations, Head of Operations and Environment, Chief Financial Officer, Service
Manager Legal Services, Service Manager People Management, Open Spaces Manager,
Equal Opportunities Officer, and L Rowan, Committee Services Officer and any comments
made have been incorporated into the report.
8. BACKGROUND PAPERS
8.1  None.
Page 18

Page 19

INTEGRATED IMPACT ASSESSMENT COVERING
• EQUALITIES & SOCIO ECONOMIC DUTIES
• HUMAN RIGHTS AND RIGHTS OF THE CHILD
DATE UPDATES/EXECUTIVE SUMMARY VERSION DETAILS
Insert Date
(e.g.
03/10/2023)
Add brief notes/highlight which section amended
(e.g. first draft of IIA completed and submitted to
SFC 25/10/2023 for consideration; noting that further
work on Stage 2 will be required). 
Insert (ShP) Version Info
(when details have been
agreed) (e.g. 5.0
03/10/2023 11:21 AMcL)
STAGE 1 - DO I NEED AN INTEGRATED IMPACT ASSESSMENT?
Name of policy or proposal:
Is this a Mark X  below
New activity, programme or policy? X
Change to an existing activity, programme or policy?
Budget proposal?
Duties: tick the boxes you think apply No Maybe  Yes
Equalities: Will your proposal have an impact on groups with
protected characteristics?
Consider the impact of your proposal on people and how they
access your services and information without barriers.
X
Socio-economic
Not every person/family has access to regular income or savings.
Will your proposal have an adverse impact on them
X
Does your proposal impact on the human rights of people? X
Does your proposal impact on the rights of children and young
people
X
Appendix 1
Page 19

Page 20

Reasoning
Briefly describe your reasoning for the responses given above: 
If you have answered “maybe” or “yes” to any of the Stage 1 questions above
then proceed to complete the Stage 2 Integrated Impact Assessment questions
below. 
If you have answered “no” to the Stage 1 questions above then provide the details below
and submit to [email] 
Lead Officer for developing the contract  Paul Wolverson
Other people involved in the screening (this
may be council staff, partners 
or others i.e. contractor or community) 
Date 1 May 2026 
Page 20

Page 21

STAGE 2: INTEGRATED IMPACT ASSESSMENT 
Brief description of the affected service
1. Describe what the service does: 
The charge relates to the undertaking of a test dig on a lair to establish the existing lair
capacity.
2. Who are your main stakeholders? 
Lair holders
Burial staff 
3. What changes as a result of the proposals? Is the service reduced or removed?
A new charge is introduced to allow lair holders to establish the remaining capacity within a 
lair 
4. How will this affect your customers?
This will allow lair holders to understand the remain capacity within a lair and allow them to
make preparations with regards future interments. 
5. Impact on staff providing the service
No negative impact on staff providing the service 
6. Please indicate if these apply to any of the protected characteristics
Protected groups Potential impacts and considerations
Race  
Disability  
Carers (for elderly, disabled or
minors) 
Sex 
Pregnancy and maternity (including
breastfeeding) 
Sexual orientation 
Age (include children, young people,
midlife and older people) 
Religion, and or belief 
Gender reassignment 
Inequalities arising from socio-
economic differences
Introducing a new charge for a test dig may create 
financial burden on lair holders   
Human rights
List of convention rights Describe, where applicable, if and how
specific rights are engaged  
Article 5: Right to liberty and
security 
Article 6: Right to a fair trial 
Page 21

Page 22

List of convention rights Describe, where applicable, if and how
specific rights are engaged
Article 8: Right to respect for private
and family life, correspondence and
the home 
Article 10: Freedom of expression 
Article 11: Freedom of assembly
and association 
Article 12: Right to marry 
Article 14: Prohibition of
discrimination (in relation to the
convention rights) 
Article 1 of Protocol 1: Protection of
property 
Article 2 of Protocol 1: Right to
education 
Article 3 of Protocol 1: Right to free
elections by secret ballot 
Children’s Rights and Wellbeing 
Relevant articles – UNCRC 
Article 2 – Non discrimination 
Article 12 – Respect of the views of the
child 
Article 3.1 – Best interest of the child 
Article 6.2 – Right to survival and
development 
7. Evidence. What information have you used to make your assessment? 
Performance data 
Internal
consultation 
Burial Team
Chief Financial Officer
Consultation with
affected groups
Funeral Directors have been informed of the new service
Local statistics 
National statistics 
Other A number of other Scottish Local Authorities provide a chargeable
service for a test dig. 
8. Evidence gaps 
Do you need additional information in order to complete the information in the previous
questions? 
No 
Page 22

Page 23

9. Mitigating action 
Can the impact of the proposed policy/activity be mitigated?  Please explain 
The provision of a test dig is an optional service. 
10. Justification
If nothing can be done to reduce the negative impact(s) but the proposed policy/activity must
go ahead, what justification is there to continue with the change?   
The provision of a test dig is optional. Lair capacity will otherwise become apparent at the
time of an interment. 
Page 23

Page 24

SECTION 3 CONCLUDING THE IIA 
Concluding the IIA 
1. No potential negative impacts on any of the protected groups were
found. 
2. Some potential negative impacts have been identified.
The impacts relate to:
Economic burden from a chargeable service 
X
Reducing discrimination, harassment, victimisation or other conduct
prohibited under the Equality Act 2010 
Promoting equality of opportunity 
Fostering good relations 
3. The proposals interfere with human rights and/or the rights of the
child 
4. Negative impacts can be mitigated the proposals as outlined in
question 9. 
5. The negative impacts cannot be fully mitigated but are justified as
outlined in question 10. 
6. Further consultation with affected groups is needed. 
7. It is advised not to go ahead with the proposals. 
Decision
Set out the rationale for deciding whether or not to proceed with the proposed actions: 
Date of Decision: 
Page 24

Page 25

Sign off and authorisation: 
Service Environmental Services
Department Operations and Environment
Policy/activity subject to IIA Introduction of a new service and charge in the
burial service 
We have completed the integrated impact
assessment for this policy/activity. 
Name: Paul Wolverson
Position: Service Manager Environmental
Services
Date: 1 May 2026
Authorisation by head of service  Name: 
Position: 
Date:
Permission to publish on website - 
Please return this form to the Equal Opportunities Officer, Chief Executive’s Office. 
Page 25

Page 26

Page 26

Page 27

Report to: Economic Development
and Infrastructure
Services Committee 
Meeting
Date:
16 June 2026  
Report by: Executive Director, Economy, Enterprise and Operations 
Author: Rhona Gunn/Beverly
Smith/Nicola Moss 
Contact
Email:
rhona.gunn@moray.gov.uk
beverly.smith@moray.gov.uk
nicola.moss@moray.gov.uk 
Subject: 2025-28 Growth, Planning and Climate and Operations and Environment
Service Plans (Year 2 refresh) 
1.  PURPOSE 
☒ For Decision      ☐  For Information 
1.1  To invite the Committee to consider the Economy, Enterprise & Operations Service Plans
(Year 2 refresh) for Growth, Planning & Climate and Operations & Environment noting that
the Service Plan for Governance was considered at Corporate Committee on 26 May 2026
and Growth, Planning & Climate Service Plan will also be considered at Planning and
Regulatory Services Committee on 02 July 2026, each in terms of their respective remits. 
1.2  This report is submitted to Committee in terms of Section III (A) (4) of the Council’s
Scheme of Administration relating to monitoring performance of the services within the
Committee’s remit in accordance with the Council’s Performance Management
Framework.  
2.  SUMMARY  
2.1  Service Plans (Year 2 refresh) have been prepared identifying the improvement targets for
the remaining term of the plan.  In preparing the plans, managers have taken account of
risk, performance data, the LOIP, the Corporate Plan and other relevant factors such as
audit and inspections outcomes.  The Service Plans also identify the resources allocated
to each service.  
3.  RECOMMENDATIONS  
3.1  It is recommended that Committee:   
i)  Consider and approve the Service Plan (Year 2 refresh) for Growth, Planning &
Climate in Appendix 1;
Item 7.
Page 27

Page 28

ii)  Consider and approve the Service Plan (Year 2 refresh) for Operations &
Environment in Appendix 2. 
Rhona Gunn
Executive Director, Economy, Enterprise and Operations 
4.  BACKGROUND AND CONTEXT  
4.1  Service planning is a key aspect of the Council’s Performance Management Framework
that sets out the strategic direction for services. 
4.2  It should be noted that actions from the refreshed Best Value Action Plan, approved by
the Corporate Committee on 26 August 2025 (para 8 of the minute refers) will be
monitored and reported out with the Service Plan process.  
4.3  The service planning process focuses on forward planning for medium-term activities
supporting delivery of the Local Outcomes Improvement Plan (LOIP) and Corporate
Plan.  The Council’s planning process also includes team plans that focus on short term
tactical and operational activities supporting delivery of the Service Plan and strategies
and Employee Review and Development Plans (ERDP) and Professional Review and
Development (PRD) plans provide individual planning for employees’ activities and
development.  
4.4  As well as identifying service developments and improvements, the Service Plan
Framework requires an assessment of the output and outcome requirements for
services based on the Council’s priorities, statutory and regulatory requirements and
other relevant local and national direction and makes use of improvement tools for
planning and continuous improvement.  Services support their improvement work with
the Public Sector Improvement Framework (PSIF) or by using another recognised self-
evaluation tool.  Across services, priority outcomes are those included in the Council’s
Corporate Plan 2024-29 that directly relate to the service or are influenced by the
service and should be clearly identified. 
4.5  Setting clear measurable outcomes and defining key indicators by which progress will
be assessed continues to be an area for development within the Council.  However, it is
recognised that for some actions it can be difficult to identify a measurable outcome
(e.g. a change in legislation that must be implemented or updating a policy framework).
Therefore, as far as possible efforts have been made to set measurable outcomes for
service plan actions but in some cases outputs and key progress milestones have been
used so that it is still possible to measure whether the action has been progressed as
intended. 
4.6  A summary of progress is given below for each of the services based on the
performance monitoring carried out throughout the year and reported to committee as
part of performance reporting.  Further information on performance at the end of
Quarter 4 is included in the service Performance Reports that are also on the agenda of
this Committee.  The Performance reports note where there is a carry forward of actions
from the previous Service Plans. 
Page 28

Page 29

4.7  It should be noted that while there has been some re-organisation of teams and
alignment of services following the management restructure, service plans have been
prepared taking account of Council priorities, national priorities and ongoing and
emerging service priorities.  Therefore, it remains appropriate to seek approval for the
year 2 refresh of Service Plans to ensure that they continue to reflect the next iteration of
priorities and direction from committee and that services are appropriately directed and
tasked. 
5.  PROPOSALS  
5.1  As the services have set high level priorities for a three-year period 2025-28,
performance is reported against that period with actions and indicators being reviewed
annually.     
Planned focus in new plans for Economy, Enterprise & Operations  
5.2   The revised Council structure has given the opportunity to consider how best to
integrate services corporately and connect service plan activity to gain greater impact
from co-ordinated, cross service effort directed towards the delivery of the Council’s
corporate plan priorities.  As a result, the corporate priority of tackling poverty and
inequality has been identified to provide a common focus across several service plans. 
More specifically, to advance this, services plan will: use whole systems approaches to
ensure there is joined up activity across services and partners; consider how data can
be used to give greater insight to enable targeting and early intervention; and take
forward the use of locality and placed based approaches to drive improved results.  
5.3  Relevant activities include progress with the Community Wealth Building Delivery Plan,
development of the Socio-Economic Plan, employability initiatives through the Local
Employability Partnership and various Moray Growth Deal projects such as Early Years
STEM intended to grow interest in higher paid STEM roles, and development of
MConnect to support affordable rural connectivity, access to employment and access
to childcare to enable employment.   
Growth, Planning and Climate  
5.4 Progress on planned work (success)
• Moray Growth Deal interim milestone of 7 out of 8 projects in delivery by March 2026
achieved. 
• Neighbourhood Board 10-year Vision and Regeneration Plan submitted to the UK
Government.
• Climate Change work progressed with the routemap to Net Zero updated, a draft
Biodiversity Strategy created and consulted, and a Just Transition strategy drafted
with a shortlist of bids approved for further development. 
5.5 Progress on planned work (areas for development / not delivered)
• Delivery of the Community Wealth Building Strategy and Action Plan has progressed
with the launch of the Benefits Portal however the draft Socio-Economic Plan is now
expected by 2027. 
• Timelines for delivery of the Forres Conservation & Heritage Scheme and the Visitor
Levy have been revised, with the latter being submitted to Full Council in June. 
Page 29

Page 30

• Production of guidance documentation, to ensure compliance with Policy 11c) in
NPF4, has progressed however some elements require consultancy and legal
support, with plans also now to link with the Socio-Economic Plan through a more
extensive consultation.   
5.6 Planned focus in new plan (reflecting above and challenges to come)
• Continued delivery of Moray Growth Deal projects.
• Review Community Wealth Building through the planning system and updated action
plan. 
• Minimise barriers to work and improve access to employment and training.  
• Delivery of Levelling Up Fund elements of the Elgin City Masterplan and the Town
Centre Improvement Plan.
• Economic Growth and Regeneration through the Conservation & Heritage Scheme
and sustainable museum service in Forres and development of a Moray wide Visitor
Levy proposal. 
• Legislative and Regulatory actions around preparation of the Moray Local
Development Plan, the Planning Improvement Framework and a team plan for
Environmental Health.
• Achievement of targets and outcomes identified in the Climate Change Action Plan. 
5.7 The service plan for Growth, Planning and Climate is attached as Appendix 1. 
Operations and Environment 
5.8 Progress on planned work (success)
• All proposed milestones for Phase 2 of Bus Revolution (m.connect) project achieved
as planned. 
• Asset Management has improved with a prioritisation methodology agreed for
maintenance of non-network bridges and a visual inspection of all retaining walls
complete.
• The Winter Maintenance Service was reviewed and Operational Plan updated.
• The Buckie Harbour Masterplan is now published with work moving to feasibility
studies and next stages. 
• To comply with the Burials and Cremation (Scotland) Act, the burial administration
service has been revised with implementation of a digitised system ongoing. 
5.9 Progress on planned work (areas for development / not delivered)
• Work to upgrade the Tranman Stores system to include scanning remains ongoing
with next stages dependent on ICT availability.  
• Competing priorities continued to affect progress of the development of a Tree
Strategy although assessments and proactive work have taken place in several parks
across Moray. 
• Progress has been slower than expected with improvements to the Pool Car scheme
due to the ongoing vacancy within the team. 
5.10 Planned focus in new plan (reflecting above and challenges to come)
• Refine the m.connect service through travel pattern data and engagement with the
business community and work towards the launch of Phase 3 of the project.
Page 30

Page 31

• Finalise a Tree Strategy to manage living assets in Parks and Open spaces and
commence risk-based tree condition surveys in prioritised areas.
• Progress the Tranman stores system upgrade.  
• Deliver climate change related improvements by facilitating a transition to low
carbon materials for roads, Active Travel strategy actions and developing draft
Surface Water Management Plans for Forres and Findhorn.  
• Continue to maximise opportunities and growth by developing a business case for
Buckie Harbour expansion and leading on the transport element of the Town Centre
Improvement Plan and the infrastructure elements of the Levelling Up Fund. 
5.11 The service plan for Operations and Environment is attached as Appendix 2.  
6.  SUMMARY OF IMPLICATIONS  
6.1  The table below shows whether risks and implications apply if the recommendations
are agreed: 
SUBJECT YES NO
Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcome Improvement Plan) ✓ 
Policy and Legal  ✓
Financial  ✓
Risk ✓ 
Staffing  ✓
Best Value and Transformation  ✓
Property  ✓
Information Communications Technology/Digital  V        ✓
Equalities. Social Inclusion and Economic Impact   ✓
Climate Change and Biodiversity Impact  ✓ 
6.2  Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcomes Improvement Plan (LOIP))
Improved Collaborative Leadership, as part of continuous improvement through Best
Value, will better enable the Council to fulfil the ambitions set out in its strategic plans. 
a) Links to Council Corporate Plan – The proposals in this report support and contribute
to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following Council Plan
strategic priorities:
☐ Tackle Poverty and Inequality.
☒ Build Stronger Greener Vibrant Economy.
☐ Build Thriving, resilient, empowered Communities.   
b) Links to Local Outcomes Improvement Plan – The proposals in this report support
and contribute to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following
Local Outcomes Improvement Plan priorities:
☒ Developing a diverse, inclusive, and sustainable economy
☐ Building a better future for our children and young people in   Moray.
☒ Empowering and connecting communities.
☐ Improving wellbeing of our population 
Page 31

Page 32

6.3  Policy and Legal 
None arising from this report.  
6.4  Financial 
None arising from this report. 
6.5  Risk 
There are potential risks around progress in all priority areas due to staffing pressures and
which often has an impact on officers.  
6.6  Staffing 
There are no staffing issues.  The service plan actions will be accommodated within
existing resources. 
The services have undertaken workforce planning to consider how best to prepare and
manage the workforce for the services to be able to respond to the agreed Council
priorities in the Corporate Plan and the service work that is required to support and
achieve those objectives.   Consideration has also been given to the Council Workforce
Strategy and Plan priorities in a service context.  The main themes arising from these
include: 
• Building capacity and resilience 
• Change management and a workforce culture to support and enable change
• Health and Well-being management (including absence management)
• Recruitment and retention 
6.7  Best Value and Transformation 
The service plans support the council to continue its Best Value journey.  
6.8  Property 
None arising directly from this report.  
6.9  Information Communications/Technology/Digital 
None arising from this report.  However, where relevant work is set out within the
workforce plans to ensure that the workforce is ready and enabled for change, including
digital skills.  
6.10  Equalities, Social Inclusion and Economic Impact 
None arising from this report.  
6.11  Climate Change and Biodiversity Impacts 
None arising directly from this report. 
Service contributions to the delivery of the Climate Change Strategy, Biodiversity Strategy,
Net Zero Fleet Strategy, Travel Strategy etc. are captured in the respective annual reports. 
The Corporate Plan recognises that sustainability, environmental, climate change and
biodiversity considerations are incorporated within existing projects and are specifically
considered as part of committee reporting processes.  In a service context, consideration
is also given to Climate Change and Biodiversity under the following main themes with
Page 32

Page 33

activities and good practice gathered half yearly within routine performance reporting
processes - 
• Contributing to the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions through reducing energy
use, recycling, planning in a way to allow use of public transport, local procurement
etc.
• Adapting to the effects of a changing climate by integrating changing climate into future
plans and existing projects, tracking weather impacts on services, supporting partners,
customers, and the public to adapt through promoting resilience
• Acting in a sustainable manner by enhancing owned greenspaces, planning in a way
that also benefits nature, ensuring staff have the skills and knowledge to protect and
restore biodiversity, help communities and clients connect with nature 
7.  CONSULTATION  
7.1  This report has been prepared in consultation with service managers in Growth, Planning
& Climate and Operations & Environment and any comments made have been
incorporated into the report.  
8.  BACKGROUND PAPERS  
8.1  Nil. 
Page 33

Page 34

APPENDIX 1
GROWTH, PLANNING & CLIMATE - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh)
SPMAN-1024035114-1057
1. Service
Definition: 
Growth, Planning & Climate delivers key regulatory services associated with five services.
Planning & Building Standards - responsible for planning management & enforcement, planning advice, permissions & consents and building standards. 
Strategic Planning & Development - leads on economic strategy development, inward investment, local development plan, regional spatial strategy, town & city
centre improvement, local place planning and climate & sustainability. 
Community Protection - delivers regulatory services for trading standards and environmental health, pest control and animal health, public health, community
safety & ASB and environmental protection. 
Economy & Enterprise - covers local business support, capital bids & external funding, tourism & regeneration, skills & employability and community wealth
building.    
Moray Growth Deal - works to progress programme management, liaison with funders & stakeholders and procurement and contract management.
2. Service
Resources:
Annual Budget 2026/27: £3,628,893
127.91FTE 
3. What have we identified for improvement in 2026-28? What evidence did we use to identify this improvement? Please add
benchmark information wherever available and relevant to the improvement.
Develop proposals for future Just Transition Bid in Financial Year 2026/27 and future
years
Climate Change Strategy 2020-30, Corporate Plan priorities
Produce one overarching Environmental Health Team Plan Food Safety, Animal Health and Health & Safety Framework
Prepare Regional Socio-Economic Benefit plan to m maximise socio-economic benefit
associated with energy developments and address community wealth building.
National Planning Framework 4, Community Wealth Building Strategy 2025, Highlands and
Islands Regional Economic Partnership (Regional Economic Strategy 2024)
Improve communications for members of the public in relation to the Moray Growth
Deal and other regeneration projects in Elgin to ensure wider appreciation of funding
outcomes
Internal Audit Recommendation
Delivery of a joined-up skills approach for Moray Corporate Plan, Moray Pathways Workforce North Group reporting to Moray Economic
Partnership, link to Moray Growth Deal
To support the Elgin Neighbourhood Board to raise awareness of the work of the Board
and the projects within the regeneration plan
Pride in Place Programme: governance and boundary guidance, March 2026
Undertake a review of Business Gateway Moray Economic Strategy
Progress Area Wide Climate Change Strategy with Moray CAN Corporate Plan, Climate Change Strategy 2020/2030, Sustainable Development Statement,
Best Value Action Plan
Note: Progress against any BV Actions will be monitored and reported out with Service Plan process   
Page 34

Page 35

APPENDIX 1
GROWTH, PLANNING & CLIMATE - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh)
SPMAN-1024035114-1057
4. Local Outcomes
Improvement Plan
(LOIP) / Corporate
Plan (CP) Outcome
or Priority
Action  Planned Outcome Outcome measures Completion
target
Lead Priority
Rating
(1 high, 3 low)
(L) Developing a diverse,
inclusive & sustainable
economy. (CP) Building
Stronger Greener Vibrant
Economy
Progress Moray Growth
Deal (MGD) and bring
remaining Moray Growth
Deal projects into
delivery.  
Retain and attract
young people / families
(16-29 years) to live and
work in the area 
By the end of the Deal
(2031): MGD outcomes
relating to GVA uplift,
tourism numbers,
affordable homes built,
job creation and skills
uplift to be achieved.
Milestone(s): 
1 project to have completed (Digital
Health), with the remaining 7 in
delivery. Eighth MGD project (skills and
innovation) to have entered delivery.
Business Enterprise Hub facility to
open (subject to the project entering
delivery by Q1 25/26). 
1 project to have been completed with
the remaining 7 in delivery. Elgin Town
Hall to reopen. Bus revolution phase 3
to commence. Work on MCIM phase 2
to have commenced (business grow
on space). 
March 2027 
March 2028
Service Manager -
Moray Growth
Deal 
1
(L) Developing a diverse,
inclusive & sustainable
economy. (CP) Building
Stronger Greener Vibrant
Economy
Review delivery of the
Community Wealth
Building Strategy through
the planning system 
Updated Community
Wealth Building Action
Plan 
Increase the number of
people in Moray
benefitting from Fair
Work practices 
Ensure wealth stays
within the hands of our
local communities  
Milestone(s):
Update the Action Plan 
Produce planning guidance on delivery
of community wealth building 
PI(s):
- (SLAED) Average gross weekly
earnings (full-time employees) 
- (SLAED) Proportion of people earning
less than the living wage 
June 2026 
March 2027 
Service Manager
– Strategic
Planning &
Development
1
Page 35

Page 36

APPENDIX 1
GROWTH, PLANNING & CLIMATE - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh)
SPMAN-1024035114-1057
(L) Developing a diverse,
inclusive & sustainable
economy. (CP) Building
Stronger Greener Vibrant
Economy
Improve access to fair
work, employment and
training opportunities by
delivering a joined-up
Skills Planning approach
Minimise barriers to
people working, such as
childcare 
Refine our Skills
Planning approach to
improve the response of
education and training
services to meet the
needs of local
businesses 
Moray Pathways
Employer Engagement
project commencing
2026-2027. 
Milestone:
Produce Moray Pathways Workforce
North Roadmap created 
PI(s):
- 5% Increase in number of females
participating in (all age)
apprenticeships at all levels
(Funding dependent – current
waiting list) 
- 5% Increase in the number of young
females participating, progressing
and sustaining learning, training and
employment opportunities across
the Moray Pathways Local
Employability Partnership 
- 5% Increase the number of young
females entering the workforce via
our Sector Based Work Academy
Programme and MERI scheme (paid
job placements)
- Number of MA and Graduate
Apprenticeships in Moray to increase
by 50 (20 via upskilling from existing
employees and 30 via newly created
apprenticeships). 
- Increase the number of businesses
engaging with Moray Pathways
Training and FE/HE provision by 10%.
- Increase the proportion of 16–29-
year-olds within Moray by 2% each
year (against NRS Mid-Year2023
data)
- Mapping of current provision and
gaps 
December
2026
Employability
Team Manager/
Moray Pathways
LEP
Lead/Workforce
North
1
Page 36

Page 37

APPENDIX 1
GROWTH, PLANNING & CLIMATE - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh)
SPMAN-1024035114-1057
(L) Developing a diverse,
inclusive & sustainable
economy. (CP) Building
Stronger Greener Vibrant
Economy
Enable more parents to
work by increasing
availability of affordable
School Aged childcare
provision
Minimise barriers to
people working such as
school aged childcare
provision  
Milestones: 
Produce policy guidance on school
aged childcare provision 
Two pilot projects within schools into
delivery 
PI(s):
- (NOMIS) Gender Pay Gap 
- (LGBF) % unemployed people
assisted into work from Council
operated/funded employability
programmes
- Increase the number of Parents
assisted through Employability
partnership
- Increase the number of School Aged
Childcare places available 
December
2026 
December
2026 
March 2027
Employability
Team Manager/
Moray Pathways
LEP Lead
1
(L) Developing a diverse,
inclusive & sustainable
economy. (CP) Building
Stronger Greener Vibrant
Economy
Delivery of the Levelling
up Fund elements of the
Elgin City Masterplan 
More of the activities,
services and plans are
influenced by the
communities they serve 
Elgin City Centre is a
prosperous, attractive
and healthy place 
Milestone(s): 
Evaluation by March 2028 
PI(s):
- (SLAED) Town Vacancy Rates
- No of empty properties and
vacant/derelict sites in the city
centre
- No of additional residential
properties in the Elgin city centre 
March 2028
Service Manager -
Strategic Planning
and Development 
1
Page 37

Page 38

APPENDIX 1
GROWTH, PLANNING & CLIMATE - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh)
SPMAN-1024035114-1057
(L) Developing a diverse,
inclusive & sustainable
economy. (CP) Building
Stronger Greener Vibrant
Economy 
Progress an Area Wide
Climate Change Strategy
with Moray CAN
The Council adapts to
the changing climate
and acts sustainably 
The strategy will guide
climate action and
nature recovery in the
region ensuring the plan
reflects the real needs
and ambitions of
Moray’s communities
Milestone (s):
Engagement on proposals 
Committee report/Community
Planning Board 
October 2026 
December
2026
Service Manager -
Strategic Planning
and Development
2
(L) Developing a diverse,
inclusive & sustainable
economy. (CP) Building
Stronger Greener Vibrant
Economy
Delivery of Town Centre
Improvement Plan &
Annual Report 
Developing a diverse,
inclusive and
sustainable economy:
By the year 2030 Moray
will have a sustainable
and inclusive economy
which generates
improved opportunities
for everyone, including
more skilled and higher
paid jobs 
PI(s):
- (SLAED) Town Vacancy Rates 
Ten-year
programme to
2035
Service Manager -
Strategic Planning
and Development
1
5. Service Level
Outcomes or
Priorities
Action Planned Outcome Outcome Measures Completion
Target
Lead Priority rating
(1 high 3 low)
Economic Growth &
Regeneration
Delivery of the 5-year
Forres Conservation &
Heritage Scheme
Forres Town Centre is
revitalised 
Milestones(s):
Vacant Property study complete 
Public realm improvements
complete 
Interpretation complete 
2 Priority Projects complete 
Building Health Check complete 
June 2026 
Sep 2027 
Sept 2027
Dec 2027
Dec 2028
Service Manager
– Economy &
Enterprise
1
Page 38

Page 39

APPENDIX 1
GROWTH, PLANNING & CLIMATE - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh)
SPMAN-1024035114-1057
Economic Growth &
Regeneration
Stage 1 & 2 Development
of Moray Visitor Levy
If approved, develop
the Moray economy,
encourage sustainable
tourism, support
related infrastructure
investment and
enhance the visitor
experience
{NOTE: Timeline subject to review and
confirmation at Full Council 30.6.26
with two options available} 
Milestones Option 1:
Paper to Committee – April 2027
Stage 1 to develop outline proposal
by March 2027
Stage 2 to consult for a period of 12
weeks 
Milestones Option 2: 
Paper to Committee – Aug 2027
Stage 1 to develop outline proposal
by June 2027 
Stage 2 to consult for a period of 12
weeks 
March 2027 
June/July 2027 
June 2027 
Nov 2027
Service Manager
– Economy &
Enterprise
1
Economic Growth &
Regeneration
New operating model for
Forres Museum
Development of a
community managed
sustainable museum
service in Forres
Milestones(s)
Governance arrangements in place 
20 Museum open days 2026
Business Plan prepared 
Fundraising activity successful 
April 2026
Jul/Aug 2026
Feb 2027
March 2027
Service Manager
– Economy &
Enterprise
1
Legislative/
Regulatory
Preparation of Moray
Local Development Plan
(LDP)
Proposed LDP to deliver
homes, employment,
prosperity, town centre
regeneration, active
travel, healthy living,
infrastructure, carbon
reduction, climate
adaptation and
biodiversity
enhancement
Milestone(s):
In accordance with updated
Development Plan Scheme
Report Proposed Plan to Council 
{NOTE: Revised Delivery Scheme and
timeline to be considered by PRS in
September} 
November 2026
Service Manager
- Strategic
Planning &
Development 
1
Legislative/
Regulatory
Deliver improvement plan
and outcomes following
the peer review process
for the Planning
Improvement Framework 
Improvement plan for
the planning service
Improved planning processes and
service delivery  
April 2027 Service Manager
– Planning &
Building
Standards
2
Page 39

Page 40

APPENDIX 1
GROWTH, PLANNING & CLIMATE - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh)
SPMAN-1024035114-1057
Legislative/
Regulatory
Produce one overarching
Environmental Health
team plan
Having an efficient and
focused service
delivering on key
statutory requirements
PI(s): 
Improved response times for EH
Performance Indicators
Two indicators: 
% of New Food Businesses
Registration and requests for advice
are given support within 120 days of
contact 
A review of our processes for
registered food businesses which
are identified as 'Awaiting
Inspection' in terms of the Food
Hygiene Information to ensure
accurate data recording 
August 2026  Service Manager
– Community
Protection
1
Climate Change and
Biodiversity
Routemap to Net Zero
Update Climate Change
Strategy including carbon,
adaptation and
biodiversity aspects 
Progress a series of
engagement activities on
climate and environmental
issues with officers
including event days. 
Achievement of targets,
indicators and
outcomes identified in
Climate Change Action
Plan to achieve carbon
neutrality 
Milestone(s): 
Approve final Climate Change
Strategy
Approved final Biodiversity Strategy 
Updated Routemap 
Two engagement events each
quarter. 
June 2026 
May 2026 
March 2027 
June 2026 and each
quarter 26/27 
Service Manager
- Strategic
Planning &
Development 
1
Workforce Planning  Prepare succession plan
for the service
The service is resilient
and able to maintain
delivery 
A plan is in place to ensure service
resilience and continuity
December 2026 H/GPC 1
Page 40

Page 41

APPENDIX 1
GROWTH, PLANNING & CLIMATE - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh)
SPMAN-1024035114-1057
Health and Wellbeing
(Staff) 
Ensure the Health and
Work Policy and
Procedures, providing a
supportive and
comprehensive
framework to manage
health and wellbeing and
any absence that occurs,
are applied by managers.  
Improve attendance at
work and manage
sickness absence
through additional
targeted support to
assist in maximising
attendance thus
reducing costs and
improve practice and
adherence to policy.
PIs
• Sickness absence days lost
(Service) (Non-Teacher) 
• % of Sickness (Service) (Non-
Teacher)
March 2027
(Ongoing Annually)
Service
Managers /
H/GPC
2
ADD ANY NEW SERVICE LEVEL ACTIONS BELOW
Action Planned Outcome Outcome Measures Completion
Target
Lead Priority rating
(1 high 3 low)
Climate Change and Biodiversity
Routemap to Net Zero
Develop proposals for future Just
Transition Bid in Financial Year
2026/27 and future years
Prepare and submit Just Transition
Bid with phasing plan for 2026 and
future years
Supports SME-led net zero innovation,
demonstrates replicable rural
decarbonisation models, embeds
community co-design, and strengthens
employment, youth retention and skills
pathway.
Milestone(s):
Prepare and submit Just
Transition Bid with phasing plan
2026/27 
Prepare and submit Just
Transition Bid for future years 
May 2026 
May 2027/2028
Service Manager –
Strategic Planning &
Development
1
Economic Growth & Regeneration
Delivery of the Pride in Place
Programme
To raise awareness of the Regeneration
Plan 
Develop options for transition to a
community led model 
Milestone (s):
Report to council in September
2026 
September 2026 
March 2027
Service Manager –
Strategic Planning &
Development
1
Economic Growth & Regeneration
Review the delivery of Business
Gateway 
Strengthening the connections between
organisations and the business
community
Milestones:
Prepare a Business Gateway
Action plan with key
recommendations to identify new
opportunities for supporting the
business community
December 2026 Service Manager –
Economy &
Enterprise
2
Page 41

Page 42

APPENDIX 1
GROWTH, PLANNING & CLIMATE - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh)
SPMAN-1024035114-1057
Legislative/Regulatory 
Review dangerous Building Call out
process inc delivery out of hours
Having a sufficient and appropriately
reactive service to keep our communities
safe
Milestone (s):
Final review and updated process  December 2026
Service Manager –
Planning & Building
Standards
1
Legislative/Regulatory 
Preparation of Regional Plan to
maximise socio-economic benefit
associated with energy
developments
Production of Regional Plan to maximise
economic impact and address
community wealth building 
Milestone(s):  
Regional Plan draft to be reported
to Council 
December 2026
Service Manager -
Strategic Planning &
Development
1
Workforce Planning
Implement agreed areas for
improvement following the PSIF
review
To ensure the service has an inclusive
workforce and delivers service
improvements
Milestone (s):
Implement agreed
recommendations in action plan 
December 2026
H/GPC 1 
Page 42

Page 43

APPENDIX 2
OPERATIONS & ENVIRONMENT - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh) 
SPMAN-1024035114-1067
1. Service
Definition: 
Operations & Environment is a diverse section delivered by five services.
Roads & Fleet - management and maintenance of public roads, winter maintenance programme, street lighting, fleet services and stores.
Environmental Services - responsible for refuse collections and recycling, street cleaning, maintaining green spaces, play areas and cemeteries and all
facilities, catering, cleaning and janitorial services. 
Transportation - manages the transportation strategy to deliver sustainable travel, school and public transport, traffic management and road safety.
Consultancy - provides all design consultancy services, architectural services, civil contingencies and emergency planning.
Harbours - management and development of harbours including commercialisation, ensures marine safety and maintenance and compliance.
2. Service
Resources:
Annual Budget 2026/27 Capital £15,445,000 Revenue £31,184,547 
Total 699.44 FTE 
3. What have we identified for improvement in 2025-28? What evidence did we use to identify this improvement? Please add benchmark
information wherever available and relevant to the improvement.
Promote and develop our approach to decarbonising Moray’s roads
Climate Change Strategy 2020-2030
Deliver improved compliance and efficiencies within Fleet services
Flood Risk Management Statutory requirements on Surface Water Management Plans and Coastal
Adaptation
Further promote and develop sustainable travel Active Travel Strategy 2022-2027, Climate Change Strategy 2020-2030, National
Transport Strategy 2
Promote Buckie Harbour for further growth and development Just Transition programme, Buckie Harbour Masterplan
Note: Progress against any BV Actions will be monitored and reported out with Service Plan process    
Page 43

Page 44

APPENDIX 2
OPERATIONS & ENVIRONMENT - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh) 
SPMAN-1024035114-1067
4. Local Outcomes
Improvement Plan
(LOIP) / Corporate
Plan (CP) Outcome
or Priority
Action  Planned Outcome Outcome measures Completion
target
Lead Priority
Rating
(1 high, 3 low)
(L) Developing a diverse,
inclusive & sustainable
economy. (CP) Building
Stronger Greener Vibrant
Economy
Progress the Bus
Revolution m.connect
project as part of
delivering the Moray
Growth Deal. 
Retain and attract young
people, minimise barriers
to working, adapt to
changing climate and
acts sustainably
Increase passenger
journeys on m.connect by
4,286p.a. 
To reduce the
environmental impact of
transport in the area by
4.3t CO2e p.a. 
Milestones: 
Workforce Mobility –
Refining our service offer
through better data on
travel patterns and
engagement with business
on commuting needs. 
Phase 3 Launch 
314 Service Launch
Annual 
Annual 
October 2026 
April 2027 
November 2027 
H of Operations &
Environment/Service
Manager -
Transportation
1
Page 44

Page 45

APPENDIX 2
OPERATIONS & ENVIRONMENT - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh) 
SPMAN-1024035114-1067
5. Service Level
Outcomes or Priorities
Action Planned Outcome Outcome Measures Completion
Target
Lead Priority rating
(1 high, 3 low)
Asset Management Identify resources in the
management of retaining
walls
A fully resourced plan to
manage and fulfil inspection
recommendations relating to
retaining walls. 
Asset Management
Plan for Moray
Council’s retaining
walls  
April 2027  Service Manager
– Design
Consultancy 
2
Asset Management Improve the rate of Principal
Inspections undertaken on
the Council's network
bridges by reassigning this
work as a top priority.
Principal Inspections rate
complies with legislation
(each network bridge to be
inspected every six years)
and Moray improves the
inspection rate to a similar
standard to other Local
Authorities
64 Principal
Inspections will be
undertaken each year
with benchmarked
improvement in bridge
condition (data
currently reported to
Society of Chief
Officers of
Transportation
Scotland (SCOTS) - will
be added to
performance reports
when available)
March 2027 with
progress to be
measured
annually 
Service Manager
– Design
Consultancy
2
Asset Management Develop a Tree Strategy
which will direct how the
Council manages its living
assets in Parks and Open
Spaces. 
Commence risk-based tree
condition surveys at
prioritised locations 
Improved tree management.
Improved health and safety
on Council owned Parks and
Open Spaces. Costed
process for undertaking
tree/surveys works which
then require budget approval 
At least two Parks and
Open Spaces assessed
per year following
budget approval.  
March 2027  Service Manager -
Environmental
Services 
2
Page 45

Page 46

APPENDIX 2
OPERATIONS & ENVIRONMENT - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh) 
SPMAN-1024035114-1067
Climate Change Develop a strategy facilitating
transition to the use of low
carbon materials on our road
network.   
Identify & trial low carbon
materials that can be used to
repair our road network.
Milestones: 
Evaluate supply chain
costs v carbon savings
v operational
performance 
Develop a strategy to
decarbonise our road
network (outlining
opportunities and
barriers) and aim to
achieve 5% of planned
pothole repairs utilising
low carbon materials 
March 2027 
March 2027 
Service Manager -
Roads & Fleet 
2
Climate Change Implement strategy for public
use of On and Off Street (car
parks) charging infrastructure
via Pathfinder Project 
Continue Pathfinder Project
with A/Shire, Aberdeen City
and Highland Councils to
seek private investment to
expand and operate publicly
available Electric Vehicle
Charging Infrastructure in
Moray.
Community Wealth Building,
Community Benefits and
Economic Social
Governance including
training and the development
of local supply chains for
repairs and servicing 
Milestones:
- Expansion of charging
network infrastructure
- 
- Implement strategy 
March 2028 
Dec 2028
Service Manager -
Transportation
2
Page 46

Page 47

APPENDIX 2
OPERATIONS & ENVIRONMENT - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh) 
SPMAN-1024035114-1067
Climate Change Delivery of Active Travel
Strategy - Promote and
develop active and green
travel in schools
Increased awareness and
participation in active and
green travel in schools
- 95% of primary
schools will deliver L2
Bikeability by 2027 
- 60% of all journeys to
school to be walked,
wheeled or cycled by
2027.
- Update Active Travel
Strategy
March 2027 
March 2027 
June 2027
Service Manager -
Transportation
1
Climate Change Develop Surface Water
Management Plans (SWMP)
for Forres and Findhorn by
end 2026/27
Implementing surface water
infrastructure improvements
in vulnerable flood risk areas: 
Reducing the risk of surface
water flooding to properties
in vulnerable areas 
Draft SWMP for Forres
& Findhorn 
Implementing surface
water infrastructure
improvements in
vulnerable flood risk
areas: (levels of risk
and areas to be
identified in surface
water management
plans) 
New schemes
prioritised in Local
Flood Risk
Management Plans for
2022 – 2028 will reduce
risk to approximately
100 properties in
Moray)
March 2027 
TBC following
completion of
plans
Service Manager
– Design
Consultancy
2
Climate Change Deliver Coastal Adaption
Plan Interim Report to
coincide with the Local Flood
Risk Management Interim
Reports
A plan to manage Moray’s
coastline that is adaptable to
climate change.
Supporting
management of
Moray’s Coastline in a
sustainable way.  
Dec 2031 
Further
milestones to be
determined
subject to funding
Service Manager
– Design
Consultancy 
2
Page 47

Page 48

APPENDIX 2
OPERATIONS & ENVIRONMENT - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh) 
SPMAN-1024035114-1067
Compliance & Efficiency Barcode / QR coded
scanning introduced into
stores processes.
Improved efficiency &
accuracy
Tranman stores system
upgrade to include
scanning system
March 2027 Fleet Services
Manager
2/3 
Compliance & Efficiency Undertake a staff led self-
assessment of our service
activities and customer
results using the PSIF model
(Public Service Improvement
Framework)
Results from self-
assessments will be used to
create a targeted action plan
for long term improvements
to the section
PSIF for 2 Service
Areas complete
Process for each
service includes: 
- Survey 
- Workshops 
- Action Plan Prepared
March 2027 Service Managers 2
Growth  Develop Business Case for
Buckie Harbour expansion
Promote development
opportunities to potential
partners and attract inward
investment
Carry out market
appraisal and further
develop design and
costings  
March 2027 Service Manager -
Harbours
2
Maximising Opportunities  Lead the transport element
of the Town Centre
Improvement Plan
Developing a diverse,
inclusive and sustainable
economy: By the year 2030
Moray will have a sustainable
and inclusive economy
which generates improved
opportunities for everyone,
including more skilled and
higher paid jobs 
Transport interventions
delivered as per
programme (still tbc
and subject to
funding): 
Milestones: 
- Active Travel
Masterplans to be
complete (2 per year)
by 2030 
- Additional cycle
parking (where
identified as a need
by the community)
by 2030 
- EV charging subject
to third party
timescales but by
2028 (end of EVIF
Grant period) 
As per agreed
programme. 
Service Manager -
Transportation
1
Page 48

Page 49

APPENDIX 2
OPERATIONS & ENVIRONMENT - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh) 
SPMAN-1024035114-1067
- Ebike charging to be
provided by and
subject to third party
timescales (Council
support only) 
Maximising Opportunities Lead the infrastructure
elements of the Levelling Up
Fund in line with Elgin City
Masterplan
Elgin City Centre is a
prosperous, attractive and
healthy place
Number of
infrastructure schemes
on target for planned
delivery (programme
still TBC – indicators to
be revised following
confirmation)
March 2027 Service Manager
– Design
Consultancy 
1
Health and Wellbeing (Staff)  Ensure the Health and Work
Policy and Procedures,
providing a supportive and
comprehensive framework to
manage health and wellbeing
and any absence that occurs,
are applied by managers.  
Improve attendance at work
and manage sickness
absence through additional
targeted support to assist in
maximising attendance thus
reducing costs and improve
practice and adherence to
policy.
PIs
• Sickness absence
days lost (Service)
(Non-Teacher) 
• % of Sickness
(Service) (Non-Teacher)
March 2027
(Ongoing
Annually)
Service
Managers/ H of
Operations &
Environment
2
ADD ANY NEW SERVICE LEVEL ACTIONS BELOW
5. Service Level
Outcomes or
Priorities
Action Planned Outcome Outcome Measures Completion
Target
Lead Priority rating
(1 high 3 low)
Maximising
Opportunities
Introduce a pilot overnight stay
initiative for
campervan/motorhome at
Burghead
Provision of a designated
overnight parking location for
campervan/motorhome users
Increased visitors to
Burghead  
Greater understanding of
the pros/cons relating to
an overnight scheme to
inform longer term
decision making
November 2026 Service Manager
Environmental
Services
1
Page 49

Page 50

APPENDIX 2
OPERATIONS & ENVIRONMENT - SERVICE PLAN 2025-28 (Year 2 refresh) 
SPMAN-1024035114-1067 
Page 50

Page 51

Report to: Economic Development
and Infrastructure
Services Committee
Meeting Date: 16 June 2026  
Report by: Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations      
Author: Martin Skinner  Contact Email: martin.skinner@moray.gov.uk  
Subject: External Grant Funding Updates 
1.  PURPOSE 
☒ For Decision      ☐  For Information 
1.1  To seek approval for submission of two community applications to the Regeneration
Capital Grant Fund (RCGF), update on Round One of the Coastal Communities (CCF)
Grant Scheme and seek approval for delivery of Round Two, and to provide updates on
other external funds.  
1.2  This report is submitted to Committee in terms of Section III (F) (29) of the Council’s
Scheme of Administration relating to application for, co-ordination and monitoring of
Council funding from European legacy and external programmes.  
2.  SUMMARY  
2.1  This report identifies potential funding opportunities that could enable significant
community investment into two locally owned assets.  It presents the results of the first
round of the CCF Grant Scheme and seeks agreement to proceed with delivery of a
second round. It also provides updates on other key external grant funding programmes
that are allocated, administered and/or awarded via application to the Economy and
Enterprise Team for a wide range of economic development, regeneration and
place�based activity across Moray.    
3.  RECOMMENDATIONS 
3.1  It is recommended that Committee:   
i)  consider and approve the request for Council to act as lead applicant for
submission of two Stage 1 community proposals to the Regeneration Capital
Grant Fund (RCGF) 2027/28 from Dufftown and District Community
Association and Leanchoil Trust, with no direct financial implications for the
Council, and if successful, submission of Stage 2 applications subject to
adequate staffing as set out in paragraphs 6.5 and 6.6;   
Item 8.
Page 51

Page 52

ii)  note the 2025/26 allocation of £170,707.94 from the Crown Estate Coastal
Community Fund, approve £100,000 for delivery of a second round of the
Coastal Communities Fund Grant Scheme as outlined in Paragraph 4.10, and
agree that £70,707.94 is retained for carry forward to be included in a 5 year
strategic plan in 2027/28, as outlined in Paragraph 4.16; and   
iii)  consider and note the updates provided for the Forres Conservation and
Heritage Scheme (FCHS), Rural Tourism Infrastructure Fund (RTIF), UK Shared
Prosperity Fund (UKSPF) and Placed Based Investment Fund (PBIF).   
Author Name: Martin Skinner
Job Title: Development Officer 
4.  BACKGROUND AND CONTEXT  
4.1  Regeneration Capital Grant Fund 2027/28
RCGF supports locally developed place-based regeneration projects that involve local
communities, help to tackle inequality and support inclusive growth in disadvantaged and
fragile communities across Scotland. The fund is primarily aimed at providing new and/or
improved infrastructure to improve the economic, social, and physical environment of
communities and is open to all 32 Scottish Local Authorities.  
4.2  Grant Lodge: Gateway to Moray was awarded £1,104,827 from RCGF in March 2026 along
with match funding of £212,427 in December 2025 from the National Lottery Heritage
Fund. 
4.3  RCGF applications follow a two-stage, competitive process. In previous years, the closing
deadline for Stage 1 applications has been end of June and if successful, Stage 2
applications have been submitted in October/November with outcomes known in January
the following year.  
4.4  It is therefore expected that an Invitation for Round 13, Stage 1 outline proposals will be
announced in May 2026 with a submission deadline of end of June 2026.  Only Local
Authorities can apply to this fund and two Community Associations in Moray have
requested for the Council to be the lead applicant on their behalf.  Please see Appendix I
for the Dufftown & District Community Association Proposed Renovation of Dufftown
Clock Tower to provide flexible community space & tourist signposting on ground floor and
bespoke holiday accommodation on the upper floor.  Please see Appendix II for the
Leanchoil Trust proposal which aims to transform the former B listed hospital in Forres
into a multi-functional Health and Wellbeing Centre.    
4.5  It is unknown how much funding will be made available for this round however £36M was
available in 2025.  The combined value of grant requests being made by the two Moray
community projects is £3,114,247 which is testament to the enterprising community
spirit. It is considered that both proposals meet the RCGF criteria and that the groups have
the capacity to deliver the projects within financial year 2027/2028 and resources are
available in house to support Stage 1 and 2 applications.  It is estimated that 10-15% of
one officer post would be required to support submission of both Stage 1 applications and
approximately 20-35% for submission of both Stage 2 applications.  However, the time
allocation would be short term.  If both applications are successful in Stage 2 and proceed
to delivery, it is estimated that 25% of an officer post would be required intermittently to
support submission of claims at regular intervals, usually quarterly.   Accountancy support
Page 52

Page 53

will also be required and is estimated to be approximately 5% per quarter.  
4.6  Coastal Communities Fund (CCF)
Crown Estate Scotland provides annual funding allocations to coastal local authorities to
deliver community benefit. These allocations are derived from Scottish Crown Estate
marine assets and are distributed in arrears following finalisation of Crown Estate
Scotland’s annual accounts. The first 5 tranches have contributed to existing council led
and partnership projects being delivered in coastal areas including the Ice Plant, Buckie
Harbour upgrades, the Coast to Country project and Forres Conservation and Heritage
Scheme.  
4.7  Tranche 6 – CCF Round One
Following approval of this committee on 2 September 2025 (Paragraph 7 of the minute
refers) the 2024/25 allocation of £133,180.78 was used to establish the first Moray Coastal
Communities Fund Grant Scheme.  The fund recognised Moray’s coastline as a key asset
for sustainable development and aimed to: 
• Support community-led and partnership projects 
• Enable regeneration opportunities 
• Promote sustainable economic, environmental and social development 
• Deliver long-term benefits to coastal communities 
4.8  The fund received 18 submissions, three of which were deemed ineligible. Following
internal assessment to confirm eligibility and a Participatory Budgeting exercise via Moray
Engage, eight projects received full funding, and one project received partial funding to
utilise the full amount of CCF funding available.  
4.9  Project Grant Award
CCF01 – Portknockie Community - café fit out £18,750
CCF02 – Scottish Dolphin Centre – equipment and lighting upgrade £12,771
CCF03 – Burghead Selkies – beach wheelchairs and beach shelter £20,000
CCF06- Spey Bay Hall external doors upgrade- part grant £2,975.80
CCF09 – Wild Things - Blue Horizon activities £10,247
CCF10 – LCDT West Beach Car Park business plan & feasibility study £20,000
CCF11 – SurfABLE Scotland - ATV beach vehicle  £12,988.98
CCF12 – Outfit Moray - Adventure by The Sea festival £19,500
CCF13 – Lossie Fisheries Museum – windows and doors upgrade £15,948
TOTALS £133,180.78 
4.10  Tranche 7 – CCF Round Two (proposed) 
For 2025/26, Moray Council has received £170,707.94, representing the seventh tranche
of funding derived from £15.98 million from net revenue generated by the Scottish Crown
Estate’s marine assets out to 12 nautical miles in 2023-2024. Payments are made in
arrears following the finalisation of Crown Estate Scotland’s annual accounts and it is
possible to carry funds forward.  It is proposed that £100,000 of the funding is allocated
Page 53

Page 54

through a second round of the CCF Grant Scheme to provide medium and strategic grants
to eligible organisations delivering projects that: 
• Support the development of active travel routes along, to and from the
coastline
• Protect and enhance coastal environments
• Support climate resilience and net zero ambitions
• Safeguard, restore or enhance the coastal environment
• Strengthen coastal communities
• Promote innovation and skills development  
4.11  Following review of Round One and consultation and discussions with the Community
Support Unit, Climate Change Strategy Officer and Highlands and Islands Enterprise
Strengthening Communities Team (HIE), it is considered appropriate to offer Medium
Grants:  £10,000– £20,000 (for medium-scale projects delivering clear community benefit)
and Strategic Grants: £20,001– £50,000 (for transformational or multi-
community/partnership projects).    
4.12  Match funding demonstrates local commitment and strengthens the overall credibility and
competitiveness of the grant application as well as ensuring that the project delivers
greater value for money by leveraging additional local resources alongside the grant
request.  However, by following a Participatory Budget process via Moray Engage, the
ability to weight projects according to match funding is not possible.  The benefits of
match funding can be highlighted and encouraged via the promotional material and
application form; however, it cannot be assessed as part of the application process unless
it is an eligibility requirement.  It is considered therefore that grants can offer up to 100%
funding to avoid curtailing applications. Projects should be completed within 12-24
months of the grant award data depending on the scale of the project and grant award.  
4.13  Who Can Apply 
Eligible applicants include:
• Community groups and voluntary organisations 
• Charities and social enterprises 
• Local development trusts 
• Educational institutions 
• Public or third-sector partnerships working in the Blue Economy
• Previous applicants that meet the new criteria and/or are delivering a second phase
of their project 
Applicants must:
• Be a constituted organisation 
• Hold a bank account in the organisation’s name 
• Demonstrate clear community benefit 
4.14  It is proposed to announce the upcoming opening of the fund immediately following
committee to allow the maximum notice period.  The fund will then open by the end of July
2026 with a submission deadline of 8 weeks.  Applications will be assessed internally to
ensure they are eligible and then as per the first round of CCF grant it is intended to
use Moray Engage platform to invite the Moray community to vote on the eligible projects
via a 2-week Participatory Budgeting exercise.  Voters will have to vote for 5 projects to
Page 54

Page 55

complete the ‘survey’ and register their votes (PB Scotland website (Voting systems for PB:
Making your choice — PB Scotland). Allowing people 5 votes complies with the Spread
Voting System.  Following the public vote, projects will be funded in vote order until the
money runs out, and any residual amount will be offered to the next project if it can deliver
a completed element of the project. 
4.15  Expected Outcomes 
The fund is expected to enhance biodiversity, support climate resilience, increase
employment and skills, improve community wellbeing, strengthen coastal economies and
improve community infrastructure.  
4.16  It is now known that annual CCF allocations of around the same level will be received over
the next 5 years.  This certainty will allow a more strategic approach going forward and will
facilitate longer term project planning.  Larger, more transformational projects that meet
the grant conditions can now be considered and will be presented in a 5-year CCF plan to
this committee for approval in 2027/28.  The remaining 2025/26 CCF allocation
(£70,707.94) will be carried forward to be included in the plan. 
4.17  Forres Conservation and Hertitage Scheme (FCHS) 
Following agreement at a meeting of this Committee on 13 August 2024 (Paragraph 11 of
the minute refers), Delivery Phase applications were submitted following the successful
completion of the 12-month Development Phase (2023-2024). These applications were
successful in securing £980,000 from Historic Environment Scotland, £790,000 from the
National Lottery Heritage Fund and £98,000 from UK Shared Prosperity Fund, to deliver the
5-year FCHS – the first of eight local improvement projects across Scotland to be
approved funding. Match funding from the Place Based Investment Programme, Town
Centre Capital Fund and Coastal Community Fund, supports an overall investment of £3.3
million.  
4.18  The Delivery Phase (2025-2029) received its permission to start in March 2025 and held its
official launch within the community in September 2025. The programme will help to
deliver the Forres Town Centre Improvement Plan which was approved at a meeting of the
Planning and Regulatory Services Committee on 25 October 2022 following an 8 week
public consultation (Paragraph 10 of the minute refers), in terms of key building repairs,
public realm improvements, historic shopfront scheme, heritage activities and
interpretation, greening projects and delivery of traditional skills training.  
4.19  The programme has successfully transitioned from development to delivery, with multiple
projects now progressing to design, community engagement and early implementation
stages, demonstrating clear momentum and local interest in the scheme.  
4.20  Current activity includes: 
• Public Realm Improvements: Concept designs for enhancements to 4 key spaces
within Forres Town Centre, including the Tolbooth and Mercat Cross area, Mosset
Green, The Needle, and four public lanes/closes have been produced. An initial public
consultation event was held on 20 March 2026 at the Tolbooth to gather feedback
from the local community, with further consultation through a library display and the
Moray Engage platform currently ongoing. Captured feedback will inform final designs
and prioritisation, with works anticipated to commence in late 2026 or early 2027 –
Page 55

Page 56

dependant on outcomes. 
4.21  • Interpretation: An Interpretation Design Plan was developed collaboratively with
the community in 2025. The project has progressed to detailed design, content
development and copywriting stage, with manufacture and installation scheduled to
begin later this year. 
4.22  • Heritage Activities: The High Street Histories project is currently researching old
photos of Forres and the history and stories of the people who lived and worked in the
town. The project has recruited 7 regular volunteers and 5 ad hoc volunteers from the
community to assist with research, collation and digitisation, working towards the
launch of an online exhibition later this year. 
4.23  • Historic Shopfront Scheme:  Following promotion of the Historic Shopfront grant
scheme last year, 10 historic shopfronts within Forres have received detailed
condition surveys and costings, identifying required repairs to the external fabric and
recommended restoration of traditional features. 1-2-1 conversations to discuss the
report findings and next steps have been offered and are currently underway.
Following completion of these conversations, grant applications are planned to open
May 2026, with potential for repair works to begin later this year. 
4.24  • Priority Buildings and Building Health Checks: Engagement is ongoing with the
owners of 4 priority buildings identified during the Development Phase, pending
updated guidance from Historic Environment Scotland on third-party grants. A
request for notes of interest in the Building Health Check grant scheme was live
throughout March 2026 following targeted promotion to eligible traditional properties
within the Forres Conservation Area. 50 buildings noted interest in receiving the free
condition survey and grant support and a shortlist of properties is currently being
prepared, with an Invitation to Quote for survey and project management of the
Building Health Checks due to be issued early May 2026. Surveys of the shortlisted
buildings are planned to take place during the summer months this year, with works
due to begin late 2026 or early 2027. 
4.25  • Evaluation: Development of the project evaluation framework is nearing
completion. A draft methodology has been received and is under review, setting out
the approach to capturing both qualitative and quantitative data to measure the
physical and community impacts of the scheme to funders and stakeholders. 
4.26  • Upcoming Procurement: Procurement activity for the remaining projects including
Vacant Property feasibility study, Greening of the Conservation Area, Traditional Skills
Training, and Family Holiday and Weekend Sessions, are planned for Q1 2026.  
4.27  Rural Tourism Infrastructure Fund
The Rural Tourism Infrastructure Fund (RTIF) is a Scottish Government capital grant
programme administered by VisitScotland, supporting tourism�related infrastructure in
rural areas.  In recent years, RTIF has operated on a more strategic basis, with investment
guided by Strategic Tourism Infrastructure Development (STID) Plans.  Moray
Council’s Moray Routes STID was approved by this Committee on 7 February 2023, and
granted delegated authority to apply for VisitScotland funding  to deliver the projects
(Paragraph 2.1 of the minute refers).  
4.28  Since approval of the STID, Moray Council has progressed projects through a phased
Page 56

Page 57

approach. In 2023–24, the Council was successful in securing RTIF design�grant funding
for the Distilleries Trail (Rothes Way) and Coastal Connections (Speyside Way - Buckie to
Spey Bay) projects, enabling detailed design and cost development work to be
undertaken.  
4.29  A full RTIF project (capital) phase application for the Rothes Way Distilleries Trail was
subsequently submitted as part of the 2025–26 Round 2 process. While this application
was unsuccessful, delivery of the project is continuing through the Rothes Way
Association (RWA), supported by Moray Council, with works currently underway and
completion anticipated in late summer 2026.  
4.30  In March 2026, VisitScotland informed officers that a design grant application would be
welcomed for Tier 1 projects before the end of the financial year to utilise available
2025/26 VisitScotland budget.  An application has been submitted to progress the two Tier
1 STID projects: Smart Destination and Informed Destination with a combined value of
£29,950.  These projects focus on visitor monitoring, digital infrastructure, interpretation
and visitor information across the Moray Routes network.  2025/26 Design Grants are
available up to a maximum of £20,000 at a 100% intervention rate. Funding decision is
now awaited.  
4.31  The 2026–27 full project funding round opened on 25 March 2026 and closed on 24 April
2026.   While the Tier 2 Coastal Connections (Speyside Way – Buckie to Spey Bay) project
had previously completed the design grant stage and was therefore eligible to apply for full
project funding, no application was progressed during this round. This reflected
discussions with VisitScotland, which advised that priority should be given to progressing
Tier 1 projects in future funding rounds, alongside the requirement for projects to secure
20% match funding.  The Coastal Connections project therefore remains a potential future
application, with an estimated total project cost of £794,600.42.  
4.32  RTIF full project funding typically requires 80% grant / 20% match funding, and work is
ongoing to identify appropriate match�funding sources to support future delivery of
STID�aligned projects.  
4.33  UK Shared Prosperity Fund (UKSPF)   
The 2022-2025 UKSPF programme (£4.315M) was the UK Government’s replacement of
the former European Structural Funds. The Fund focused on improving pride in place,
supporting local businesses, and improving life chances, with activity aligned to local
economic, social and community priorities.  
4.34  Activity was delivered across the three national investment priorities: Communities and
Place, Supporting Local Business, and People and Skills, alongside the ring�fenced
Multiply programme supporting adult numeracy. Moray Council has acted as the Lead
Local Authority, responsible for governance, appraisal, contract management, monitoring
and reporting to UK Government.  The Moray Economic Partnership, supported by
thematic engagement across community, business and employability interests within the
remit of this partnership was responsible for strategic oversight and allocation of funds
which enabled flexibility in responding to local needs while working within evolving
national guidance.  
4.35  A detailed breakdown of UKSPF allocations and projects delivered during the 2022–25
programme and 2025–26 transition year is provided in Appendix III and Appendix IV for
Page 57

Page 58

information.  
4.36  UKSPF in Moray has supported a diverse mix of projects delivered by Council services and
external partners, including community regeneration activity, town centre and other
place�based initiatives, business and social enterprise support, employability
interventions, and targeted skills and numeracy provision. Delivery has included both
revenue and capital activity, supported through Service Level Agreements and grant
funding mechanisms.  
4.37  Programme delivery has taken place during a period of ongoing change, including evolving
UK Government guidance, compressed delivery timescales and capacity pressures across
the public and third sectors. These challenges have been actively managed through close
programme monitoring, engagement with delivery partners and appropriate reprofiling of
funding to ensure compliance and maximise local impact.  
4.38  An independent evaluation of Moray’s UKSPF 2022-25 programme is underway, with early
findings confirming strong alignment with local priorities and partnership working, while
also highlighting lessons that may help inform the design and delivery of future
place�based funding programmes.  
4.39  In 2025–26, UKSPF entered a transitional extension year, with a reduced national funding
allocation and revised reporting arrangements. Moray Council received a 2025–26 UKSPF
allocation of £1,415,076, comprising both capital and revenue funding. The previous
multi�year Investment Plan was replaced by a Forecast Report, with increased emphasis
on mission�led themes.  A delivery extension has been granted which enables activity to
continue to 30 September 2026 and will facilitate full use of the allocated budget. 
4.40  The UK Government published the Pride and Place Strategy in September 2025, providing
further detail on the relationship with UKSPF and the emerging Local Growth Fund (LGF)
replacement model.  A subsequent note set out the methodology used to allocate LGF
across Scotland, based on Regional Economic Partnerships containing areas with the
lowest Real Disposable Household Income (RDHI) per capita. In January 2026, it was
confirmed that Moray Council had not been allocated funding through the new LGF
programme which totals £140M.  Only five Regional Economic Partnerships were awarded
funding through this mechanism. This means there is currently no direct successor
funding stream identified to replace UKSPF investment in Moray.  
4.41  Following this announcement, officers began engagement and lobbying activity at COSLA
and SLAED level.  A further letter has been submitted to the Scotland Office by the
Highlands and Islands Regional Economic Partnership (HIREP), to which Moray Council
officers contributed.  It is understood that Members have also been involved with written
communications regarding this loss of funding, including via the Community Planning
Board.  
4.42  Placed Based Investment Fund (PBIF)
2025/26 is the final year of the five-year PBIF programme which aimed to deliver shared
ambitions for place, town centre revitalisation, living well local, community-led
regeneration, community wealth building and community ownership.  The full allocation of
£466,000 was expected to be paid in two tranches and the first payment of £364,878 was
received in January 2026.  Tranche 1 has delivered a Town Centre Capital Grant Scheme
across Moray and contributed to the purchase of the former Gordon Arms Hotel in Elgin
town centre to develop a creative arts centre as part of the Council’s wider regeneration of
Page 58

Page 59

the area.  However, the Tranche 2 allocation of £101,122 has not been released due to
wider budgetary challenges. 
5.  PROPOSALS  
5.1  It is proposed that Council acts as lead applicant for RCGF and that officers submit both
Stage 1outline proposals on behalf of the community associations, followed by Stage 2
applications if successful and subject to adequate staffing for that stage.  Both proposals
have ambitious regeneration plans in the respective areas and have dedicated and
experienced staff with capacity to deliver. The projects have been locally developed,
involving the communities and on completion will create economic, social and physical
regeneration outcomes.  Should any management or other issues arise in the interim, a
further report will be submitted to this committee.  
5.2  It is proposed that £100,000 of the Crown Estate Coastal Community Fund 2025/26
allocation of £170,707.94 is used to deliver a second round of the Coastal Communities
Fund Grant Scheme, as outlined in Paragraph 4.11, and that the remaining £70,707.94 is
carried forward to be included in a 5-year CCF Strategic Plan, as outlined in Paragraph
4.16.  
6.  SUMMARY OF IMPLICATIONS  
6.1  The table below shows whether risks and implications apply if the recommendations are
agreed: 
SUBJECT YES NO
Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcome Improvement Plan) ☒ ☐
Policy and Legal ☒ ☐
Financial ☒ ☐
Risk ☒ ☐
Staffing ☒ ☐
Best Value and Transformation ☒ ☐
Property ☐ ☒
Information Communications Technology/Digital ☐ ☒
Equalities. Social Inclusion and Economic Impact  ☒ ☐
Climate Change and Biodiversity Impact ☒ ☐ 
6.2  Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcomes Improvement Plan (LOIP))
Improved Collaborative Leadership, as part of continuous improvement through Best
Value, will better enable the Council to fulfil the ambitions set out in its strategic plans. 
a) Links to Council Corporate Plan – The proposals in this report support and contribute
to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following Council Plan
strategic priorities:
☒ Tackle Poverty and Inequality.
☒ Build Stronger Greener Vibrant Economy.
☒ Build Thriving, resilient, empowered Communities.   
b) Links to Local Outcomes Improvement Plan – The proposals in this report support
and contribute to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following
Local Outcomes Improvement Plan priorities:
Page 59

Page 60

☒ Developing a diverse, inclusive, and sustainable economy
☐ Building a better future for our children and young people in   Moray.
☒ Empowering and connecting communities.
☒ Improving wellbeing of our population 
6.3  Policy and Legal 
The Council assesses support for economic development initiatives on their individual
merits, guided by the objectives of facilitating sustainable economic growth and achieving
the outcomes set out in the Ten-Year Plan and Corporate Plan.  For any partnership
agreements Legal will be consulted.  
6.4  Financial
RCGF
There are no direct financial implications for Council however there is a risk of the third
sector providers being unable to fulfil the funding conditions and the Council being liable
to repay the grant funding.  Mitigations are set out in the risk section.   
The total request for RCGF funding in 2027/28 between the two proposals is £3,114,247
however it is considered unlikely that both outline proposals will be invited to submit
applications for Stage 2. 
Project Total Project Cost RCGF request
24/25
Match Funding
Leanchoil Trust £7,382,192 £2,500,000 £4,882,192 to be
confirmed
Dufftown Clock
Tower
£886,261 £614,247 £272,014 to be
confirmed
TOTAL £8,268,453 £3,114,247  £5,154,206   
CCF
External funding allocation for 2025/26 is £170,707.94.  These funds do not need to be
spent in the Year allocated.   
FCHS
External funding applications for the Delivery Phase successfully secured £980,000 from
Historic Environment Scotland, £790,000 from the National Lottery Heritage Fund and
£98,000 from UK Shared Prosperity Fund - in addition to previous funding secured from
the Place Based Investment Programme, Town Centre Capital Fund and Coastal
Community Fund, supporting overall investment of £3.3 million.   
RTIF
The total cost of the Smart Destination and Informed Destination Tier 1 design�stage
projects is £29,950, with £19,950 sought from the fund and a £10,000 contribution from
the Strategic Planning, Economic Development revenue budget. 
The funding supports design and feasibility work only, including professional fees and site
assessment activity, with no irrecoverable VAT identified at this stage. 
Any future progression to RTIF full project phase (capital) funding would typically require
an 80% grant / 20% match�funding arrangement.
Page 60

Page 61

UKSPF
For the period 2022 to 2025, Moray Council was allocated a total of £4.315 million
comprising £559,762 capital funding, £3,010,350 revenue funding and £745,217
ring�fenced revenue funding for the Multiply programme.     
For 2025–2026, Moray Council received a transitional UKSPF allocation of £1,415,076,
comprising £401,239 capital funding and £1,013,837 revenue funding. UK Government
confirmed in December 2025 that eligible expenditure may take place up to 30
September 2026.   
Programme governance and financial monitoring arrangements remain in place for the
duration of the extended delivery period. There is currently no direct successor funding
stream to replace UKSPF investment in Moray. 
One off Costs:
Service
Area
Budget Budget
Years
Proposed
Spend this
Year
Virement
From
Other
Comments       
Annually Recurring Costs:
Service
Area
Budget With
Effect
From
Annual
Net
Impact
Virement
From (if
applicable)
Other
Comments       
6.5  Risk
Identified risks include: 
• Funding Uncertainty – delivery of activity is dependent on competitive external
funding programmes. Delays, changes to funder priorities, or unsuccessful
applications could limit progress.
• Match Funding Constraints – where funding requires match contributions, delays or
shortfalls in securing match funding could affect the timing or viability of future
projects.
• Programme Timescales – externally imposed spend deadlines and approval
timescales may create delivery pressures, particularly where projects are complex
or multi�partner.
• Delivery Capacity – reliance on internal capacity and external delivery partners may
impact the Council’s ability to progress projects at pace.
• Compliance and Clawback Risk – failure to meet funder conditions, outputs or
reporting requirements could result in delayed payments or recovery of grant
funding.
• Staff capacity – there is a risk that officers will not have capacity to support RCGF
projects however this will be monitored carefully and reviewed, if necessary, at
Stage 2.
• Appendix V summarises Council responsibilities per fund.   
While these risks cannot be removed entirely, they can be mitigated through established
Page 61

Page 62

programme governance arrangements, early engagement with funders, and a phased and
prioritised approach to project development.  Where appropriate, projects are progressed
through an initial design and feasibility stage to confirm scope, costs and deliverability
before full delivery is considered, helping to manage capacity pressures, reduce delivery
risk, and ensure funding requirements and timescales are actively monitored.   
For RCGF there is a risk of the 3rd sector providers being unable to fulfil the funding
conditions and the Council being liable to repay the grant funding.  To mitigate any risks,
partnership agreements will be drawn up at full application stage outlining that the Trusts
will adhere to all funders grant conditions and that they are solely responsible for any
liabilities associated with the funding. The agreements will also confirm that all match
funding must be in place prior to any work starting and that details of suitable professional
management arrangements with regular reporting, compliance with procurement and
subsidy control requirements must be provided.  There is also a risk to Council as lead
applicant that the 3rd sector providers will not have the capacity to deliver the capital
projects.  However, both organisations have at least one full time person in post to deliver
the projects, professional expertise will be included within the overall project costs to
ensure that construction meets the required standards.  There is a risk that changes to
staff resources and workload will affect capacity to support the projects.  To ensure
balanced resource and to mitigate risk, staff capacity will be reviewed at Stage 2 to ensure
that sufficient support is available and that the Economy and Enterprise Team also have
capacity to manage other allocated funds and any new project work.  
6.6  Staffing
Administration and reporting on external funding is undertaken by the Economy and
Enterprise Team.   
RCGF - the community organisations will prepare their applications and claims; set up
project systems for carrying out the works including for procurement, monitoring and
evaluation. Staff from the Economy and Enterprise Team will provide support for
submitting the applications, interim and final claims to the RCGF supported by staff from
Accountancy and arrange for claimed funds to be transferred to the organisations. If staff
capacity to support the projects is no longer available, officer support will be reviewed at
Stage 2.  Both applicants have been made aware that they require suitably qualified and
experienced project management staff and arrangements in place. If staffing in third party
organisations falls short of these requirements, consideration of officer support for
submission of Stage 2 applications will need to be reviewed.  Appendix V summarises
staff role per fund.   
CCF - administration of the grant scheme will be accommodated within existing staffing
resource.  There will be collective responsibility for development of the 5-year Strategic
Plan and project delivery will be led by the departments concerned.   
FCHS – dedicated Project Officer in place and supported by the Economy and Enterprise
Team.   
RTIF - any future funding applications or project delivery activity will continue to be
supported by the Economy and Enterprise Team, with input from other Council services as
required including Open Spaces and Active Travel.  Projects will only be delivered subject
to accessing sufficient funding, securing project management resource and where
existing staffing capacity allows.  
Page 62

Page 63

UKSPF – Monitoring and Compliance Officer in post until August 2026 and Officer support
in place to oversee the fund until November 2026.  
6.7  Best Value and Transformation
The use of external grant funding supports Best Value by enabling the Council to deliver
economic development, regeneration and place�based activity without placing additional
pressure on core budgets. Programmes such as the UKSPF and the RTIF have allowed
targeted investment to be made in response to local needs, while operating within clearly
defined funding conditions and timescales.   
Delivery of these programmes has required robust governance, monitoring and reporting
arrangements, and has contributed to continuous improvement in how the Council
appraises, manages and evaluates external funding.  Lessons learned through UKSPF
delivery, including partnership working, programme flexibility and capacity management,
will help inform the Council’s approach to future place�based funding opportunities.  
6.8  Property 
The RCGF community proposals relate to community owned assets.    
6.9  Information Communications/Technology/Digital 
If the RTIF application for Smart Destination is successful, enhanced data collection
regarding use of Moray’s Routes will support evidence�based visitor management and
infrastructure planning, including identifying pressure points, understanding patterns of
use, and strengthening the business case for future funding from public and private
sources. 
6.10 Equalities, Social Inclusion and Economic Impact
An equality impact assessment is not required as the reason for the report is for the
Council to consider being the lead applicant for the community organisations to access
funds, which they could not undertake themselves. 
The focus of the RCGF is on projects in areas that suffer from high levels of deprivation and
disadvantage and that demonstrate clear community involvement. Being lead applicant
for the projects will assist the council in addressing socio-economic inequalities in
accordance with the Fairer Scotland duty.   
The other external funding programmes outlined in this report support activity that
contributes positively to social inclusion and economic outcomes across Moray. Funding
has been targeted towards place�based regeneration, community capacity building,
employability and skills provision, business support and improved access to services and
infrastructure.   
UKSPF investment has focused on reducing barriers to participation in the economy,
supporting communities experiencing disadvantage, and improving life chances through
employability, skills and numeracy interventions. RTIF activity supports sustainable
tourism by managing visitor pressures, improving accessibility and reducing adverse
impacts on local communities in rural areas.   
The use of external funding enables targeted interventions that respond to local need and
supports inclusive economic growth. Equalities and socio�economic considerations are
embedded within programme appraisal, project selection and monitoring arrangements,
and individual projects are required to comply with relevant equality legislation and funder
Page 63

Page 64

requirements.  
6.11 Climate Change and Biodiversity Impacts
RCGF projects must demonstrate consideration and contribution towards achieving the
target of net-zero carbon emissions by 2045.   
CCF eligible projects include those that protect and enhance coastal environments,
support climate resilience and net zero ambitions and safeguard, restore or enhance the
coastal environment.   
FCHS includes greening of the Conservation Area - supporting food growing, wildlife
enhancements and biodiversity - and explore the reuse of vacant buildings.   
RTIF supports sustainable place�based development, including improved visitor
management, active travel routes and digital infrastructure, contributing indirectly to
climate change mitigation and adaptation objectives. 
7.  CONSULTATION   
7.1  This report has been prepared in consultation with Executive Director Economy, Enterprise
and Operations; Executive Director Finance, Strategy and Transformation, Head of Growth,
Planning and Climate (Chief Planning Officer); Head of Operations and Environment, Head
of Housing, Property and Communities, Chief Financial Officer, Service Manager Economy
and Enterprise, Service Manager Legal Services, and Lissa Rowan, Committee Services
Officer and any comments made have been incorporated into the report. 
8.  BACKGROUND PAPERS  
8.1  ED&I Committee report on External Grant Funding Updates 20 June 2023 (Item 12) 
8.2  ED&I Committee report on Moray Routes: Bright Futures 7 February 2023 (Item 12) 
8.3  ED&I Committee report on Town Centre Improvement Plans Update and Funding
Opportunities 5 September 2023 (Item 8b) 
8.4  Documents on file in Economy and Enterprise section 
Page 64

Page 65

Appendix I - Dufftown and District Community Association Clock Tower Proposal
Overview: Dufftown & District Community Association (DDCA) was established in 1995
through the amalgamation of two groups and is the key anchor organisation for the
town.
The renovation of this listed landmark building to conservation standards will both
protect the building for the future and deliver strong economic and social outcomes
which will benefit both the town and its visitors.
The indicative total project cost is £ £886,261with a proposed application to RCGF of
£614,247.
Background: Dufftown and District Community Association (DDCA) is an open
membership, community owned and run organisation in Dufftown. It was established in
1995 and holds charitable status.
DDCA purchased the clock tower from Moray Council in 2020 and consulted with
community groups in Dufftown to establish the main priorities for the period 2021 –
2026. This consultation led to the publication of a 5-year Community Action Plan and
restoration of the clock tower was identified as one of the top priorities. 
It has been identified that this renovation project is central to the revitalisation of
Dufftown town centre. It will foster pride in the community, providing a space where
residents can gather, celebrate their heritage, and see their stories preserved and
importantly, become a catalyst for economic, social, and cultural renewal in Dufftown.
The restoration of the clock tower will create a long term, financially sustainable and
flexible facility which will serve the local community and become a destination for
visitors. 
Safeguarding Dufftown’s heritage, ensuring that its story, architecture, and historic
features remain part of the landscape for generations to come in tandem with providing
a destination attraction is paramount.
Beyond heritage, there is a clear practical need for this project. Dufftown currently
lacks sufficient visitor accommodation, limiting tourism and economic opportunities.
The Clock Tower’s upper floors will provide bespoke holiday accommodation, helping
meet this demand while creating a living museum that tells local stories, from its time
as a jail and Burgh Chambers to connections with the whisky industry and Scottish
Canadian railway links.
The project is central to the revitalisation of Dufftown town centre, and by restoring this
important key landmark and activating the building with flexible community space and
visitor accommodation, it will strengthen the town’s appeal and vitality. 
Page 65

Page 66

Economic – During the pandemic several shops closed in the town centre and
Dufftown currently offers less tourist beds than similar towns per head of population.
There is little on offer in terms of unique holiday accommodation in the area. 
Owing to its central location the clock tower can become a central hub for the
community and visitor experiences, provide much needed signposting to other tourist
venues whilst increasing footfall within the town. Walking tourism is increasingly
popular and Dufftown benefits both from being on the Isla Way and as a result of having
developed its own walking trails, the Clocktower is a main gathering point as many
walks start and end here.
Environmental – The clock tower is a Grade B listed building and DDCA have
commissioned a conservation led- yet environmentally friendly design so the focus is to
minimise any environmental impact. Traditional and natural materials will be used
where possible with renewable energy options included.
Social – The project will ensure that the building will once again sit at the core of
community life, offering a space to meet and interact. The restoration of the clock tower
will provide an opportunity for the local community to shape their own future;
increasing the sense of pride and a shared identity. 
Community groups will benefit from their own, flexible high-quality space on the ground
floor, and the project will promote local asset use, and improving the sense of
community identity and cohesion and enhanced community networks.
This project is part of wider regeneration ambitions and DDCA is Dufftown’s anchor
organisation and is part of the Moray Speyside Appendix III Tourism Forum.
DDCA have developed a close relationship with HIE who part fund their community
development and have delivered the project business plan. Partnerships are central to
the success of the ground floor hub and Speyside Youth, and four other local
community groups have noted interest in using the proposed community space.
The proposed future use of the clock tower complements wider ambitions related to
making Speyside a unique visitor destination, building on our heritage and tailoring it to
increasing demand for bespoke experiences.
Total Cost
Project total cost is £886,261 with a grant application request to RCGF of an estimated
£614,247 with match funding to be confirmed in due course.
Timeframes for securing other funding
June/July 2026 – HES funding for approximately £272,014
June – September 2026 – Other local funding secured from a variety of sources.
Timescales and objectives
May – October 2026 Securing supporting funding streams and RCGF Stage 1 application
Page 66

Page 67

October 2026 – RCGF Stage 2 application
January 2027 Securing RCGF funding
Spring 2027 – Main renovation works to commence – approximately 3 months duration
Autumn 2026 – Completion and opening of building
Page 67

Page 68

Appendix II - Leanchoil Hospital Regeneration Project, Forres
Overview
The Leanchoil Hospital Regeneration Project is a community-led initiative to transform
the former Leanchoil Hospital in Forres into a multi-functional Health and Wellbeing
Centre. The development will bring together health, housing, childcare, education and
community services on a single accessible site.
The project will restore the vacant Category B listed hospital, supporting inclusive
economic growth, improving local services and delivering sustainable rural
regeneration. Located within walking distance of Forres town centre, the development
supports 20-minute neighbourhood and Town Centre First principles. The project is led
by Leanchoil Trust in partnership with public, private and third sector organisations.
Background
Leanchoil Hospital served Forres and surrounding rural communities until its closure by
NHS Grampian in 2018. The site includes two Category B listed buildings set within 9.5
acres of woodland and grounds.
Following closure, Leanchoil Trust was established in 2020 to secure the building for
community use. After extensive engagement and consultation, a Community Asset
Transfer from NHS Grampian was completed in March 2026.
Consultation identified key local needs including: 
● Loss of local health services
● Lack of supported and accessible housing for older people
● Increasing demand for respite care
● Shortage of childcare and out-of-school provision
● Skills gaps, particularly in STEM
● A vacant heritage asset requiring restoration 
Additional evidence of need includes: 
● Ageing population (over-65s 2.4% above Scottish average)
● Areas of Forres within 10–20% most deprived in Scotland (SIMD)
● Limited access to preventative health services
● Limited childcare provision for ages 3–8 and no Out of School Care
● Vacant 450m² building and wider development site 
What this Project Will Deliver & Regeneration Outcomes 
The project will deliver phased regeneration of the Leanchoil site including: 
● Restoration of the Category B listed hospital building
● Multi-functional Health and Wellbeing Centre
● 41 assisted living flats (with Hanover Scotland)
Page 68

Page 69

● STEM learning facility (with Moray Council)
● Earth Time Forest Nursery (ages 3–8) and Out of School Care
● Scottish Ambulance Service facility
● Future development across the 9.5-acre site
● Green space and nature-based activities 
This co-located model will provide integrated health, housing, childcare, education and
emergency services in one accessible location. Social Return on Investment analysis
indicates £5.07 of social value for every £1 invested. 
The project will also deliver: 
● Approximately 100 construction jobs
● Long-term employment opportunities
● Increased local spending and economic activity
● Skills and training opportunities
● Improved access to services and reduced inequalities 
Key partners include Hanover Scotland, NHS Grampian, Health and Social Care Moray,
Moray Council, Highlands and Islands Enterprise, Scottish Ambulance Service and third
sector organisations.
Development to date includes feasibility work, planning permission, business planning
and design team procurement. The project is expected to be construction-ready by
March 2027.
Economic Outcomes 
● Approximately 100 construction jobs
● Long-term employment across health, childcare, education and services
● Opportunities for local SMEs and practitioners
● Increased footfall and local spending
● Support for parental employment through childcare
● Skills development and workforce growth 
Training and skills opportunities include heritage and construction training, STEM
education, volunteering, and Community Wealth Building. 
Environmental Outcomes 
● Reuse of vacant listed building reducing embodied carbon
● Low-carbon energy systems
● Reduced travel through co-located services
● Integration of green space and outdoor activity
● Woodland use for education and wellbeing
● Nature-based solutions supporting biodiversity
Page 69

Page 70

● Alignment with Net Zero objectives 
Social Outcomes 
● Improved access to health and wellbeing services
● Reduced inequalities through local provision
● Increased independence for older people
● Improved childcare provision
● Enhanced education and skills opportunities
● Strengthened community cohesion
● Improved physical and mental wellbeing
● Increased volunteering and participation 
The project has been shaped through 22 consultation events, engagement with over
500 individuals and ongoing stakeholder collaboration.
Total Cost
Phase Description Total
Cost
RCGF
Contributio
n
Phase 1 Full Fabric Repairs and Envelope £1,830,0
00 £596,000
Phase 2
Central Core including roof, stairs, walls,
heating, electrics, toilets,
communications & security, finishes,
café kitchen, insulation and energy
saving measures
£2,250,0
00 £675,000
Phase 3 Health and Wellbeing Wing
Refurbishment
£805,00
0 £555,000
Phase 4a Moray Growth Deal STEM Wing £450,00
0 —
Phase 4b Scottish Ambulance Service Training and
Crew Facility
£510,00
0 £460,000
External
Works
Parking (including EV charging points),
paths and landscaping
£1,010,0
00 £114,000
Professional
Fees (Est.) Professional Fees £273,00
0 —
Activities &
Project
Management
Staff for Capital Project and delivery
costs
£267,95
0 £100,000   
£2,500,000 
Timeframes for Securing Other Funding
Page 70

Page 71

Funding applications will be aligned with project development milestones and capital
delivery requirements.
Potential other funding:
RCGF £2,500,000 
2027/28
Business energy Scotland £130,000
Garfield Weston £100,000
Historic Environment Scotland £500,000
Highlands and Islands Enterprise £500,000
Just Transition £500,000
National Lottery Heritage Fund £1,365,585  
SSEN £216,800
Moray Growth Deal STEM £450,000
Wolfson Foundation £75,000
Hanover Scotland - Contribution towards external works £593,000
In kind noncash contributions £40,000
Local Fundraising and donors £36,1807
Scottish Ambulance Service £50,000
Total £4,882,192 
Timescales and Objectives
Since 2018, the project has progressed significantly and is now at an advanced stage of
development, with funding from NLHF, Pilgrim Trust, AHF, SLF, Berry Burn Community
Fund.
Work completed includes:
• Feasibility studies and options appraisal
• Planning permission granted
• A robust business plan
• Community Wealth Building research
• Tender submission for design team with a view to submitting for building warrant
in September 2026 and achieving RIBA 4i by end 2026 
The project is structured in phases to support delivery and funding alignment, including
the integration of health, housing, and service provision.
Pre-construction costs of £1.33 million have been secured through: 
• NHS Grampian support
• Capital receipt from land sale
Page 71

Page 72

• Highlands and Islands Enterprise funding 
The project is expected to be construction-ready by March 2027, with RCGF funding
critical to enabling the capital works required to bring the building back into use. 
The Leanchoil Hospital Regeneration Project represents a transformational,
community-led investment that will restore a valued heritage asset while delivering
integrated services, economic opportunity and improved wellbeing for Forres and the
wider Moray area. 
Page 72

Page 73

Appendix III - UKSPF funding allocation for Moray by intervention groups 
UKSPF funding allocation for Moray by intervention group (2022-2025)
Intervention group Financial year Capital allocation Revenue allocation
Communities and Place
2022-2023 £45,060 £97,051
2023-2024 £108,316 £181,972
2024-2025 £406,386 £447,343
Total £559,762 £726,366
Supporting Local Business
2022-2023 £- £97,052
2023-2024 £- £181,972
2024-2025 £- £447,343
Total £- £726,367
People and Skills
2022-2023 £- £194,103
2023-2024 £- £363,943
2024-2025 £- £894,685
Total £- £1,452,731 
UKSPF funding allocation for Moray by intervention group (2025-2026)
Investment Priority Capital allocation Revenue allocation
Communities & Place £401,239  £272,786 
Supporting Local Business   £208,786 
People & Skills   £481,573 
Total £401,239 £963,145 
Page 73

Page 74

Appendix IV - UKSPF project allocation for Moray by intervention groups 
UKSPF projects by intervention group (2022-2025)
Intervention group Project Allocation
Communities & Place - S1 Development phase for Forres Town Centre Improvement
Plan via Forres Conservation & Heritage Scheme & Delivery  £73,611
Communities & Place - S1 Town Centre Improvement Plan Delivery £311,807
Communities & Place - S1 Falconer Museum Feasibility £14,867
Communities & Place - S1 Lighting upgrades to Duke of Gordon monument Ladyhill,
Elgin £41,904
Communities & Place - S1 Public Realm Improvements – inc. Cullen Mercat Cross &
Forres Noticeboards £21,000
Communities & Place - S1 St. Giles Support Grants £93,887
Communities & Place - S5 Athletics Facility Feasibility Study £30,000
Communities & Place - S5 Art, Culture and Heritage Grants £198,860
Communities & Place - S9 Community Resilience Group Grants £12,508
Communities & Place - S12 Digital Poverty  £46,061
Communities & Place - S12 Community Digital hubs £58,594
Supporting Local Business – S15   Micro to SME dev support events £14,297
Supporting Local Business – S15  BG Business Support £9,151
Supporting Local Business – S15  Digital Grant Scheme £190,842
Supporting Local Business – S15  Community Wealth Building  £31,875
Supporting Local Business – S20  ‘Green’ specialist  £110,000
Supporting Local Business - S22 Social Enterprise Development £100,000
Supporting Local Business - S26 Employment incentive grants via MERI scheme £96,974
Supporting Local Business – S26  Graduate Placement Scheme £75,000
People & Skills – S31 Employability £221,944
People & Skills – S31 Money Advice £444,199
People & Skills – S31 CLD £133,141
People & Skills - S31 Child Poverty £34,290
People & Skills - S35 Employability Commissioning inc. SWAP Programme £679,183 
UKSPF projects by intervention group (2025-2026)
Intervention group Project Allocation
Communities and Place Community Wealth Building £81,864
Communities and Place Digital Inclusion and Infrastructure Project £54,000
Communities and Place Digitising Moray’s Heritage £36,922
Communities and Place Forres Town Centre Improvement Plan £160,000
Communities and Place Linzee Gordon Park Development £32,000
Communities and Place Sustainable Volunteering Project £53,000
Communities and Place Tourism Strategy £15,000
Communities and Place Town Centre Regeneration £241,239
People and Skills Moray Pathways Employment Support £126,678
People and Skills Moray Pathways Financial Literacy Project £133,058
People and Skills Moray Pathways Sector-Based Work Academy
Programme £221,837
Supporting Local Business Apprenticeship Engagement and Development Lead £72,218
Supporting Local Business Business Growth Programme £22,000
Supporting Local Business Third Sector Entrepreneurship Support £65,000
Supporting Local Business Town Centre Manager  £49,568
Page 74

Page 75

Page 75

Page 76

Appendix V
Fund Project/Total
Cost
Council Role/Liability Funding
Proposed/Requested
Match Funding Secured/Applied For
RCGF Dufftown Clock
Tower 
£865,411
• Lead applicant on behalf of community
organisation (CO)
• Arrange Partnership Agreement (PA) between
Council and CO if application successful
• Liaise with CO and Scottish Gov (SG)
• Submit claims and reporting, ensuring
project delivery meets grant conditions
• PA limits the Council’s liability by transferring
risk to the Community Organisation through
indemnity. 
£614,247 proposed HES (tbc Jun/July 26) - £272,014
Leanchoil
Hospital 
£7,382,192
• Lead applicant on behalf of community
organisation (CO)
• Arrange Partnership Agreement (PA) between
Council and CO if application successful
• Liaise with CO and Scottish Gov (SG)
• Submit claims and reporting, ensuring
project delivery meets grant conditions
• PA limits the Council’s liability by transferring
risk to the Community Organisation through
indemnity.
£2,500,000
proposed
Hanover Scotland - £593,000 (agreed Deed
of Condition)
HIE - £500,000 (confirmed)
Moray Growth Deal STEM - £450,000 (Award
in Principle)
HES - £500,000 (Stage 2 application in Jun
2026)
NLHF - £1,365,585 (Stage 2 application Nov
2026) 
Business Energy Scotland - £130,000 (pre-
application submitted)
Wolfson Foundation - £75,000 (award
decision Jun 2026)
SSEN £216,800 (application for Aug 2026)
Garfield Weston - £100,000 (50% secured)
Just Transition - £500,000 (tbc 27/28)
In kind contributions - £40,000
Local funds and donors - £361,807
Scottish Ambulance - £50,000 (under
discussion)
Page 76

Page 77

CCF Proposed Round
2 CCF Grant
Scheme
• Promote and manage application process 
• Assess applications for eligibility
• Administer participatory budgeting (PB)
process and publish grant results
• Administer claims
• Grant conditions limit the Council’s liability,
with responsibility for delivery, compliance,
and financial risk largely borne by the grant
recipient.
£100,000 proposed Encouraged but not necessary
RTIF Design Grant for
Tier 1 projects of
Moray’s Routes
STID
£29,950
• Sole Applicant
• Full responsibility for procurement and
commissioning
• Manage consultants and contracts
• Approve outputs and ensure quality
• Submit claims and reports
• The Council has limited liability (capped at
the grant) but retains responsibility for
delivery and compliance. Procurement
contract will be arranged if successful. 
£19,950 applied for £10,000 SPD budget
FCHS Public Realm,
Interpretation
Grant Schemes,
Training,
Greening,
Community
Heritage
Activities 
£3.3M
• Dedicated Project Officer (externally funded)
deals with all aspects of project promotion,
planning, delivery and reporting to funders
• E&E team support
• Internal coordination across services
• The Council retains full responsibility for
delivery and compliance.  Procurement
contracts are arranged for all external
suppliers, with appropriate conditions
attached to all grants provided which limits
liability.
£3.3M secured HES - £980k
NLHF - £790k
PBIF - £200k
UKSPF - £98k
CCF - £124k
TCF - £304k
Private - £861 
PBIF Town Centre
Capital Grant
Scheme
• SPD administer the grant scheme
• Grant conditions limit the Council’s liability,
with responsibility for delivery, compliance,
and financial risk largely borne by the grant
£201,822 allocated Owner 50%
Page 77

Page 78

recipient. Scheme now complete. 
Purchase of
former Gordon
Arms Hotel
• SPD facilitated the purchase
• The Council retains responsibility for delivery
and compliance.  Purchase now complete.
£163,000 allocated Levelling Up Fund
UKSPF
22-25
Various (see
Appendix 
• Administer, monitor and report
• Liaise with project deliverers, internal council
departments and the MEP
• Comply with Memorandum of Understanding
and Grant Determination Letter. Procurement
contracts in place for all external suppliers,
PA’s arranged for external deliverers and
appropriate conditions attached to all grants
provided which limits liability.  Programme
now complete.
£4.3M allocated Various £532k
UKSPF
2025-
26
Various • Administer, monitor and report
• Liaise with project deliverers, internal council
departments and the MEP
• Comply with Memorandum of Understanding
and Grant Determination Letter.  
Procurement contracts in place for all
external suppliers, PA’s arranged for external
deliverers and appropriate conditions
attached to all grants provided which limits
liability.  Programme to end 30 September
2026.
£1.4M allocated Various (tbc) 
Page 78

Page 79

FUNDING KEY
RCGF Regeneration Capital Grant Fund
CCF Coastal Community Fund
RTIF Rural Tourism Infrastructure Fund
FCHS Forres Conservation & Heritage Scheme
PBIF Place Based Investment Fund
UKSPF UK Shared Prosperity Fund
HES Historic Environment Scotland
HIE Highlands & Islands Enterprise
NLHF National Lottery Heritage Fund
SSEN Scottish & Southern Electricity Network
SPD Strategic Planning & Development
TCF Town Centre Capital Fund 
Page 79

Page 80

Page 80

Page 81

Report to: Economic Development
and Infrastructure
Services Committee 
Meeting Date: 16 June 2026  
Report by: Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations      
Author: June Burnett Contact Email: June.burnett@moray.gov.uk 
Subject: Tourism Strategy for Moray 
1.  PURPOSE 
☒ For Decision      ☐  For Information 
1.1  The purpose of this report is to present the final “Moray Tourism 2036 – Our Ten-Year
Strategy” and to seek approval to align with the Strategy as the strategic framework for
tourism development, management and promotion in Moray, and to endorse the proposed
collaborative approach to delivery.  
1.2  This report is submitted to Committee in terms of Section III (F) (28) of the Council’s
Scheme of Administration relating to promoting Tourism development in Moray.  
2.  SUMMARY  
2.1  At a meeting on 10 March 2026, this Committee agreed the draft Moray Tourism 2036 – Our
10-Year Strategy; for the draft Strategy to proceed to a 6-week public consultation period
via Moray Engage; for the draft Strategy to be submitted to the Moray Economic
Partnership (MEP) during the consultation period for their feedback and for a final Strategy,
reflecting all consultation and partner feedback, to be reported back to this Committee for
approval (para 16 of the minute refers)  
2.2  The feedback from the public consultation is included as Appendix 1.    
2.3  Consultation and partner feedback has been incorporated into the proposed final version
of Moray Tourism 2036 – Our Ten-Year Strategy, which is included in Appendix 2.  
2.4  Moray Tourism 2036 – Our Ten-Year Strategy sets a new place-based and community-
powered approach to tourism development over the next decade.    
2.5  The Strategy moves beyond destination marketing to focus on stewardship, co-ordination
and wellbeing, recognising tourism as a contributor to community prosperity,
placemaking, skills, cultural vitality and environmental responsibility rather than a
standalone sector.  
Item 9.
Page 81

Page 82

2.6  Alongside the Strategy, three supporting but interlinked documents have been produced
to provide supporting context and guidance. These documents – How We Got Here, The
10-Year Strategy Explained and Guidelines for Delivery – are included as background
papers.  
3.  RECOMMENDATIONS 
3.1  It is recommended that Committee:   
i)  note the responses received from the public consultation on the draft
Strategy, as outlined in Appendix 1;   
ii)  approves the Moray Tourism 2036 – Our Ten-Year Strategy as set out in
Appendix 2;   
iii)  note that a phased and collaborative delivery model will be developed,
including transitional leadership and coordination arrangements; and   
iv)  agree that officers progress the initial enabling actions identified within the
Strategy, including supporting the establishment of an interim tourism
leadership group and coordination arrangement.   
June Burnett
Business Gateway Manager 
4.  BACKGROUND AND CONTEXT  
4.1  Tourism is a significant contributor to Moray’s economy, supporting approximately 2,900
jobs and generating an estimated £189 million annually. Moray benefits from strong global
brands, including Speyside whisky, golf and heritage assets, as well as a loyal domestic
market that contributes to one of the highest repeat-visit rates in Scotland.  
4.2  The previous Tourism in Moray Strategy which covered the period to 2025, has now
concluded.  At the same time, the Tourism Business Improvement District (TBID), Visit
Moray Speyside, was unsuccessful in its renewal ballot in March 2025, resulting in the
closure of the TBID.  This has left a recognised gap in the coordination and promotion of
the area, with no destination management organisation (DMO) currently in place. At the
time of the ballot, Visit Moray Speyside had been preparing to commission a new tourism
strategy; however, this work did not progress.  
4.3  In response to the conclusion of the previous strategy and the closure of the TBID, Moray
Council assumed responsibility for procuring a new long-term tourism strategy.  Funding
for its development was secured from the UK Shared Prosperity Fund, Highlands & Islands
Enterprise (HIE) and Visit Moray & Speyside Ltd. 
4.4  The tender process was completed in August 2025.  An Information Report to Council on 3
December 2025 identified the tourism strategy as a key element of the Stage 1 process for
considering the potential introduction of a Visitor Levy in Moray.  
4.5  The Strategy has been developed by SCOTO CIC using their industry knowledge, Press
Pause® methodology and informed by a three-month engagement programme comprising:
• an online survey
Page 82

Page 83

• seven area-based workshops
• six themed online forums; and
• a strategic business session along with Moray Chamber of Commerce and
business members  
4.6  More than 300 individuals and organisations contributed over 480 hours of engagement,
ensuring the Strategy reflects local capacity, challenges and ambition.  
4.7  A six-week public consultation on the draft Strategy was undertaken via the Council’s
Moray Engage platform between 17 March and 28 April 2026. 
4.8  Key statistics from the consultation are set out below:
• 359 project page visits
• 254 visited at least one page
• 138 visited multiple pages
• 104 downloads of the Strategy document
• Maximum visits 42 in one day
• 8.36% response rate as a percentage of page visits  
4.9  A total of 30 responses were received during the six-week public consultation, alongside
partner feedback. Overall, the draft Strategy was broadly welcomed, with respondents
recognising its strong alignment with Moray’s identity, assets and long-term opportunities  
4.10  Key points raised include:
• request for greater clarity on delivery, governance and early actions; 
• concerns regarding infrastructure (e.g. roads, signage, transport and town centres); 
• suggestions to strengthen emphasis on particular sectors or assets (e.g. culture,
coastal communities, aviation heritage); and 
differing views on market focus, funding (including the potential visitor levy) and the
balance between ambition and practicality  
4.11  Having reviewed all feedback, it is considered that no material changes to the Strategy are
required, with the exception of a minor amendment to wording on page 16, which was
viewed as negative. This has been revised accordingly.  This is because:
• many comments relate to delivery or day-to-day issues, which are outside the
scope of a high-level strategy and will be dealt with through implementation; 
• the Strategy is intended to be flexible and able to change over time as priorities,
funding and partnerships develop; 
• the main issues raised (such as infrastructure, coordination, leadership and
promotion) are already recognised in the Strategy; and 
• giving greater priority to specific sectors or interests would undermine the
Strategy’s place-based, balanced and inclusive approach, which intentionally
avoids over-weighting any single sector or place
Full detail of the consultation feedback is provided in Appendix 1.  
4.12  The Strategy aligns strongly with national and local policy, including Scotland Outlook
2030, the Place Principle, community empowerment legislation, responsible tourism
priorities, the Moray Economic Strategy, Moray Growth Deal, Moray Climate Strategy,
Moray’s Routes, the Local Development Plan and Local Place Plans. 
5.  PROPOSALS
Page 83

Page 84

5.1  Moray Tourism 2036 – Our Ten-Year Strategy provides a clear long-term framework for a
place-based, community-powered approach to tourism development across Moray.  
5.2  Key elements of the Strategy include:
• A Clear Vision
• Guiding Principles
• Strategic Pillars
• Experience Clusters
• Priority market segments
• Guidance for delivery, including a phased delivery plan  
5.3  The Guidance for Delivery is not a fixed or defined pathway. It provides a practical starting
point and a solid foundation that can adapt and evolve over time to reflect emerging
priorities, available resources, funding and collaborative approaches.  
5.4  The Strategy has been subject to a 6-week public consultation via Moray Engage,
alongside engagement with the Moray Economic Partnership (MEP). All feedback has been
reviewed and, where appropriate, incorporated into the final Strategy presented in
Appendix 2.  
5.5  The final Strategy provides a flexible and evolving framework, rather than a fixed delivery
plan, enabling it to respond to emerging priorities, available resources and partnership
opportunities.  
5.6  The Strategy will also be used to support the Stage 1 pre-consultation on the potential
introduction of a Visitor Levy in Moray. It will outline the types of activity and investment
that could be supported should a levy be taken forward.  
5.7  Subject to approval, the Strategy will be formally published and shared.  It will be used to
inform the pre-consultation discussions on the potential introduction of a Visitor Levy in
Moray, for which an agreed tourism strategy is a key requirement.  
5.8 Alongside this, an open call will be issued for individuals across the tourism and business
community to come forward to form an interim Tourism Leadership Group. This group will
provide early coordination, help build momentum, and act as a first step in progressing
collaborative delivery of the Strategy’s priorities. 
5.9 In parallel, Business Gateway will review opportunities to deliver targeted workshops,
events and support for the tourism sector, aligned to the Strategy’s priorities, to help build
capacity, encourage engagement and support early implementation activity.  
6.  SUMMARY OF IMPLICATIONS  
6.1  The table below shows whether risks and implications apply if the recommendations are
agreed: 
SUBJECT YES NO
Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcome Improvement Plan) ☒ ☐
Page 84

Page 85

Policy and Legal ☒ ☐
Financial ☒ ☐
Risk ☒ ☐
Staffing ☒ ☐
Best Value and Transformation ☒ ☐
Property ☐ ☒
Information Communications Technology/Digital ☐ ☒
Equalities. Social Inclusion and Economic Impact  ☒ ☐
Climate Change and Biodiversity Impact ☒ ☐ 
6.2  Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcomes Improvement Plan (LOIP))
Improved Collaborative Leadership, as part of continuous improvement through Best
Value, will better enable the Council to fulfil the ambitions set out in its strategic plans. 
a) Links to Council Corporate Plan – The proposals in this report support and contribute
to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following Council Plan
strategic priorities:
☐ Tackle Poverty and Inequality.
☒ Build Stronger Greener Vibrant Economy.
☒ Build Thriving, resilient, empowered Communities.   
b) Links to Local Outcomes Improvement Plan – The proposals in this report support
and contribute to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following
Local Outcomes Improvement Plan priorities:
☒ Developing a diverse, inclusive, and sustainable economy
☐ Building a better future for our children and young people in   Moray.
☒ Empowering and connecting communities.
☒ Improving wellbeing of our population 
6.3  Policy and Legal 
The Council assesses support for economic development initiatives on their individual
merits, guided by the objectives of facilitating sustainable economic growth and achieving
the outcomes set out in the Ten-Year Plan and Corporate Plan.  
6.4  Financial 
Funding will be required to deliver the Strategy. There is no direct requirement for funding
from Moray Council at this stage, and no budget has currently been allocated for delivery. 
A phased delivery model and emphasis on collaboration and partnership working means
that funding may potentially be secured through a combination of approaches:
• External Funding - applications to appropriate national and regional programmes
will be pursued to support implementation.  External sources currently
administered by the Council which could contribute to aspects of delivery include
the Crown Estate Coastal Communities Fund. Some potential sources of applied
for funding include the Regeneration Tourism Infrastructure Fund (RTIF) for
suitable projects identified in the Moray’s Routes strategic investment plan, and
the National Lottery Heritage Fund.
• Blended Model - delivery will rely on a mix of public sector contributions through
external grants, partnership funding and contributions, and if approved by
Members, a potential visitor levy scheme.
• Council Role - the Council may act as lead applicant for certain funding streams
where appropriate.
Page 85

Page 86

• Officer Support - Council officers could potentially play a key role in supporting
partners to develop and submit funding applications. 
Visit Moray & Speyside Ltd held an Extraordinary General Meeting on 8 May 2026. 
However, as the meeting was not quorate, no decision could be taken.
If the funds of £100K are agreed to be returned to Moray Council, this will be the subject
of a separate report. 
It is important to note that the funding landscape evolves quickly.  As projects are
prioritised, suitable funding opportunities can be sought to support delivery. 
One off Costs:
Service
Area
Budget Budget
Years
Proposed
Spend this
Year
Virement
From
Other
Comments       
Annually Recurring Costs:
Service
Area
Budget With
Effect
From
Annual
Net
Impact
Virement
From (if
applicable)
Other
Comments       
6.5  Risk 
Identified risks include:
• Lack or Loss of Momentum – with limited coordination in place, there is a risk that
momentum cannot be built or may be further eroded without early action, leading
to a potential decline in stakeholder confidence.
• Insufficient Coordination - fragmented efforts could limit impact.
• Funding Uncertainty - delivery depends on a blended funding model.  Delays or
shortfalls in securing funding could stall progress.
• Volunteer Fatigue- heavy reliance on community effort without support may reduce
capacity.
• Digital Visibility Gaps - delay in relaunching Moray’s digital presence risks
competitiveness and market visibility.
• Staff capacity to support – unknown level of support required beyond initial set-up
period.  Careful assessment of funding applications needed on a project-by-project
basis and consideration of appropriate communications support. 
While these risks cannot be removed entirely, they can be mitigated through the delivery
framework set out in the Strategy which includes interim governance arrangements,
phased delivery, early digital relaunch, and a clear funding roadmap.  
6.6  Staffing 
Initial delivery will rely on officer support and can be accommodated within the existing
resources of the Economy and Enterprise Team if current staffing levels are maintained,
and existing workload is rebalanced across the team.  This initial support will be primarily
focused on establishing the interim Tourism Leadership Group (TLG) and putting in place
early coordination arrangements to address the current gap in destination leadership.
In addition, staffing requirements will include:
Page 86

Page 87

• Communications support – officers will be required to share the Strategy widely,
including press releases, social media posts and updates to the Council
website/Moray Engage.
• Programme and project delivery - there may be a staffing requirement for
infrastructure projects, however, it is too early to determine the specific nature or
scale of these requirements. Projects will be prioritised and programmed in
advance, allowing sufficient lead time for allocation of officer time or external
support where needed. 
Future staffing implications will be reviewed and reported as required.  
6.7  Best Value and Transformation 
The Strategy promotes collaboration, and supports efficient, place-based delivery. It
aligns with Best Value principles by embedding continuous improvement, partnership
working, and community empowerment.  
6.8  Property 
Nothing arising from this report.  
6.9  Information Communications/Technology/Digital 
Nothing arising from this report.  
6.10  Equalities, Social Inclusion and Economic Impact 
The Strategy embeds inclusive growth, accessibility, fair work, and community benefit
among its core principles. It aims to improve access for all abilities, strengthen local
supply chains, and create fair employment opportunities across Moray.  
6.11  Climate Change and Biodiversity Impacts 
Tourism can cause carbon emissions through transport, accommodation etc. The impacts
of climate change as well as the impacts of higher tourist numbers can place stress on
vulnerable areas of nature and the environment.  The environment of Moray is a main
factor behind the decision of many to visit the area and to experience the beauty of our
coasts, forests and mountains.
Stewardship, climate action and nature recovery are integral to the Strategy, supporting
Moray’s climate and biodiversity commitments. 
7.  CONSULTATION  
7.1  This report has been prepared in consultation with Executive Director Economy, Enterprise
and Operations; Chief Financial Officer; Head of Growth, Planning and Climate (Chief
Planning Officer); Head of Operations and Environment; Service Manager Legal Services;
Service Manager Economy and Enterprise; Service Manager Strategic Planning; Senior
Communications and Media Officer, and Lissa Rowan, Committee Services Officer and
any comments made have been incorporated into the report.   
8.  BACKGROUND PAPERS  
8.1  Moray Tourism 2036 - How we Got Here 
Moray Tourism 2036 - The 10-Year Strategy Explained 
Moray Tourism 2036 - Guidelines for Delivery 
Page 87

Page 88

No embedded text on this page.

Page 89

MORAY
TOURISM
2036
Our Ten Year Strategy
Connected. Supported. Promoted
January 2026
Appendix 1
Page 89

Page 90

This document forms the primary and first in the 
portfolio of four strategic documents:
1. Moray Tourism
2036 - The 10 Year Strategy
2. Moray Tourism
2036 - How
We Got Here
3. Moray Tourism
2036 - The 10 Year Strategy Explained
4. Moray Tourism
2036 - Guidance for Delivery
A glossary is provided in document 3.
2 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 3
WELCOME 
TO
OUR
STRATEGY
Contents
Moray Tourism
2036
This strategy marks a fundamental rewrite of how
tourism
is planned, led and experienced across
Moray. It is built from
community insight, local
knowledge and lived experience, ensuring a high-
quality visitor experience and that every action
begins with and benefits the businesses and people
who call Moray home.
By appraising local capacity and capability, then
centring on inclusion, collaboration and place-
based decision making, the strategy champions a
model where tourism
strengthens local services,
supports local enterprise and enhances everyday
life and prospects. Success is defined by delivering
clear, realistic and lasting benefits for all.
Moray Tourism
2036 has been developed through
an extensive engagement programme including
an online survey, seven area-based Press Pause®
workshops, six on-line themed forums, interviews
with partner organisations and a strategic meeting
with Moray Chamber of Commerce and business
members. More than 300 people contributed their
time, experience and insight, committing over 480
hours to informing the strategy and articulating a
shared ambition for tourism
in Moray.
Drawing on this lived experience, SCOTO
CIC
has synthesised these insights into a coherent,
place-led tourism
strategy that builds on Moray’s
distinctive strengths while addressing key gaps
and pressures. At its heart is a quiet yet confident
narrative that reflects Moray’s people and places,
and positions tourism
as purposeful, connected
and grounded in local reality.
Developed in the absence of a formal destination
organisation, Moray Tourism
2036 addresses
both the what and the how. Early emphasis is
placed on re-establishing effective leadership and
coordination, strengthening collaboration and
enabling a shared narrative for Moray that can be
confidently and collectively owned and amplified.
This Strategy is aligned with national, regional and
local priorities for sustainable economic growth,
climate responsibility and community wellbeing.
It supports wider ambitions to strengthen Moray’s
economy, protect and enhance its natural and
cultural assets, and ensure that growth delivers
lasting benefit for people and place. Tourism
is
positioned not as a standalone sector, but as a
contributor to wider outcomes across enterprise,
skills, culture, land, nature and communities.
Fundamentally, the strategy calls for a shift in
mindset away from
tourism
as something that
simply happens in Moray, towards an approach
that is shaped with Moray. Collaboration is central,
bringing communities, businesses and partners
together around shared priorities and a clear
understanding of what success looks like.
3
WELCOME TO
OUR STRATEGY
4
OUR TOURISM
STRATEGY ROOTED IN
MORAY’S IDENTITY
6
A STRATEGY FOCUSED ON
PEOPLE, PLACES & PURPOSE
9
THE OPPORTUNITY
10
WHAT IS HOLDING MORAY BACK?
14
THE CASE FOR CHANGE
16
OUR SIX STRATEGIC PILLARS
18
OUR PRIORITY MARKETS
20
MORAY’S EXPERIENCE CLUSTERS
22
COLLABORATIVE MARKETING & PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT
23
GUIDANCE FOR DELIVERY
24
OUR STRATEGIC FRAMEWORK
26
OUR EIGHT DELIVERY FRAMEWORKS
27
OUR PHASED DELIVERY PLAN
28
MEASURING OUR SUCCESS
30
MORAY SPEAKING FOR ITSELF
Page 90

Page 91

MORAY 
SPEAKING
FOR 
ITSELF
“MORAY ISN’T
LOUD – 
IT WHISPERS.
BUT IF YOU 
LISTEN
CLOSELY,
IT TELLS THE
KIND OF 
STORY THAT
STAYS WITH
YOU...”
Moray stands at an important moment.
Following the closure of Visit Moray Speyside in
2025, stakeholders across the region; communities,
volunteers, businesses, land managers, cultural
organisations and national partners, voiced a
unified message:
Moray has enormous potential, but its strengths are
not yet connected, coordinated or confidently
communicated.
“Moray isn’t loud – it whispers.  
But if you listen closely,
it tells the kind of story that stays with you...”
Moray is not Scotland’s loudest destination and that
is part of its charm, and its strength. It is a place to
slow
down, delve deeper and return often. A place
where people, nature and culture flourish together
and where visiting feels like a privilege.
Moray does not demand attention.
It earns it.
Slowly, warmly, deeply.
This shared narrative becomes the anchor for how
Moray speaks to Scotland, the UK and the world -
just as importantly, how
the people of Moray speak
about themselves with confidence and pride.
This tourism
strategy is grounded in a narrative
that reflects Moray as it truly is:
Welcoming towns 
and villages
Creative communities
and deep heritage
Calm, restorative
landscapes
Exceptional craftsmanship
in whisky and food
Quiet excellence and
authenticity
4 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
Moray Tourism
2036
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 5
Page 91

Page 92

A STRATEGY FOCUSED
ON
PEOPLE,
PLACES & PURPOSE
Moray Tourism
2036 focuses on strengthening
connection between visitors, communities,
businesses and places; providing practical support
for those shaping the visitor experience; and
promoting Moray through a clear, shared narrative
that can be confidently communicated by all.
This vision is rooted in:
• 
Community empowerment
• 
The wellbeing economy
• 
Stewardship, responsibility and sustainability
• 
Collaboration and partnership
• 
Pride of place
OUR MISSION
The mission for the next decade is:
To build a joined-up, inclusive and resilient visitor
economy rooted in local identity, community
involvement, meaningful local benefit and
environmental stewardship, enabling every
enterprise and place in Moray to contribute
confidently to a shared story and shared
prosperity.
OUR VALUES
This vision and mission reflect Moray’s desire to be:
• 
Balanced —
growing shoulder seasons, not   
summer pressure, encouraging dispersal across 
the destination, respecting local capacity and 
capability
• 
Connected —
linking coast and mountains,   
whisky and culture, nature and towns into one 
living story
• 
Fair —
offering fair work and ensuring 
communities, volunteers and small enterprises 
feel real benefit
•
Creative —
celebrating Moray’s makers, 
languages, heritage and festivals
• 
Caring —
protecting the landscapes, wildlife, 
coastlines and communities that define the   
region
• 
Confident —
presenting a clearer, bolder 
narrative of who Moray is and connecting with our
neighbouring destinations where visitors 
originate from
OUR
VISION
By 2036, Moray will be
recognised as a leading
example of place-based,
community-powered,
responsible tourism. 
A place where outstanding
global brands and local
enterprise thrive together
and tourism
enriches
local life, strengthens
communities, enhances
and celebrates nature and
culture, and offers visitors
meaningful experiences
across all seasons.
6 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
Moray Tourism
2036
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 7
Page 92

Page 93

OUR 
GUIDING 
PRINCIPLES
MORAY’S GUIDING
PRINCIPLES: SHAPING
DECISIONS AND ACTION
A Joined-Up
Place Led
Proposition
- Connecting
Moray’s hidden
assets with its
global brands;
linking place
and people as
one coherent
destination.
- A collegiate,
agile and
transparent
destination
management
model that
represents
businesses,
communities,
global brands
and volunteer
groups.
A Renewed
Place
Narrative
- Rooted in
Moray’s
landscapes,
people, culture,
creativity, and
contrasts.
- A strong,
place-rooted,
cohesive story
guides how
Moray presents
itself and how
businesses
and  
communities
collaborate
translating into
authentic
memorable.
experiences.
A Confident
Foundation
For Enterprise
And Prosperity
- Creating an
environment for
enterprise to
invest and grow
with clarity and
confidence.
- Tourism
empowers
businesses and
communities to
invest with
confidence,
supporting fair
work, skills and
a resilient
workforce.
A W
ellbeing
Economy Lens
- Tourism
as a
driver of 
local pride, 
resilience,
and fair work
balancing
people, places
and profit.
- Tourism
growth
should be
supported by
the essential
infrastructure
that serves both
residents and
visitors.
Communities
As Partners
Not Spectators
- Recognising
local
organisations,
charities, social
enterprises and
volunteers as
essential
contributors.
- Visitors feel
connected
through
authentic, 
placebased
experiences
developed
collaboratively
and delivered
by proud local
people.
Stewardship
First
- Tourism
that
strengthens
everyday life,
protects 
Moray’s
landscapes and
delivers long-
term
value for
communities,
businesses and
visitors.
- Growth is
paced to local
capacity,
with investment
in infrastructure,
environment
and visitor
management
coming before
promotion.
THE OPPORTUNITY
Available STEAM
data which is modelled year on
year highlights that Tourism
in Moray already
contributes:
The latest VisitScotland visitor survey suggests
Moray enjoys Scotland’s highest repeat-visit rate
(91%). This loyalty is a remarkable asset.
Tourism
is clearly an established and important part
of the local economy although what remains
unknown is how
much of that spend stays in the
local economy, how
many jobs are living wage and
permanent jobs, and what motivates the repeat
visits. Moray Tourism
2036 provides the platform
for
ensuring tourism
doesn’t just happen in Moray, but
brings tangible benefits to the people, businesses
and communities of Moray and is a net contributor
and not a net extractor.
2,900 jobs
stable across several years
£189m
in annual economic value
8 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
Based on the extensive
engagement from
businesses, communities
and key stakeholders
the strategy focuses on
six guiding principles.
These build on current
capacity, capability and
lived experience and set
a renewed place-based
framework for growth and
prosperity.
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 9
Page 93

Page 94

WHAT IS HOLDING
MORAY BACK?
MORAY’S EVOLVING
PLACE
W
ITHIN
SCOTLAND’S TOURISM
LANDSCAPE
Moray has for many years been largely subsumed by
wider tourism
geographies and consequently has
been on the fringe – on the edge of the Highlands, of
Aberdeen and Aberdeenshire and of the Cairngorms
National Park.
Some domestic visitors are deeply aware of Moray’s
appeal and return regularly, often through family
connections or long-standing relationships with the
area. High-end international visitors, particularly
those exploring Scotland’s whisky, golf and country
sports offer, do arrive in Moray, but frequently as
part of a wider itinerary, with relatively limited 
dwell time.
For most others Moray is easily bypassed whether
heading north to Inverness, the NC500 and the west
highlands or stopping short at Cairngorms or
Aberdeenshire and not venturing that bit further. 
For many. Moray remains less visible, less
understood and less clearly defined as a destination
in its own right.
A STRUCTURAL GAP IN
DESTINATION
LEADERSHIP AND
COORDINATION
These challenges have been amplified by the
closure of Visit Moray Speyside following the
unsuccessful renewal ballot for the Tourism
BID in
March 2025.
While cohesive destination management was
emerging, the loss of the Destination Marketing
Organisation has created a significant gap in
leadership, coordination and collaboration.
Destination marketing activity has largely ceased,
established digital platforms are no longer
proactively managed, and there is no focal point
for collective action, engagement with the travel
trade or joined-up promotion. Events and initiatives
continue to take place, but without a shared
framework to connect effort, resources or impact
DESTINATION 
COMPETENCE
A locally led, place based SCOTO
Press Pause®
appraisal of Moray’s destination competence
highlighted these issues clearly. Exploring 20 criteria
across 13 communities and their hinterland and
drawing on lived experience and local perception,
the appraisal explored how
Moray’s many places
currently “do tourism”, identifying strengths and
catalysts for growth alongside gaps and weaknesses
that limit destination readiness. Each criterion is
scored through facilitated conversation as a red,
amber or green. Red indicates a major weakness -
the criteria doesn’t exist or is not functioning. Amber
indicates where improvement is needed and green
suggests all is well and this is a local strength.
The findings consistently pointed to issues
of capacity, capability, coordination and
collaboration, rather than shortcomings in the
quality of Moray’s offer.
Refer to Moray Tourism
2036 - How
We Got Here
10 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
“THE FINDINGS
CONSISTENTLY
POINTED TO
ISSUES OF
CAPACITY, CAPABILITY,
COORDINATION
AND
COLLABORATION,
RATHER THAN
SHORTCOMINGS
IN
THE QUALITY OF
MORAY’S OFFER.”
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 11
Page 94

Page 95

TOURISM
TRADITION
Deep-rooted hospitality and heritage tradition
with a contrasting mix of coastal holiday parks
fishing villages and traditional hunting, shooting,
fishing, golf and whisky – however, not cohesive and
underpromoted
ARTS, CULTURE & HERITAGE
High-quality and notable historic connections and
experiences; active arts scene; current notable
investment programme; under-promoted
W
ILDLIFE & NATURE
High-quality coastal, river and woodland
habitats with excellent trails and wildlife spotting
opportunities; dark skies exceptional; under-
promoted
FEATURES & ATTRACTIONS
A decent range of significant natural and built
features of interest and attractions – under-
promoted and not joined up
VISITOR ACCOMMODATION
Quality has been improving; notably holiday parks
on coast; lost some self-catering units; limited
luxury/group options for travel trade; major impact
on availability from
demand for workers
FOOD & DRINK 
High-quality local produce; extensive distillery-
related experiences; good day time café culture;
limited fine dining and evening options
EVENTS & FESTIVALS
Vibrant local community-based events: some long-
standing region-wide activity which helps stimulate
collaboration; lack of a joined-up calendar of events
and programming
MAKERS & PRODUCERS
Good base across the region with art and food
producers; NEOS annual event and a range of
galleries and craft shops in town and villages but
overall lack of consistency
TRAVEL & CONNECTIVITY
Patchy public transport for visitors to move around
especially in rural areas; M-Connect has improved;
good rail access in Elgin and Keith linking to
Inverness and Aberdeen; very limited taxi options
RETAIL
Strong luxury shopping offer in a few
locations;
strong independent retail offer in smaller towns;
Elgin lagging with several empty units in the centre
AMENITIES & INFRASTRUCTURE
Good availability of basic services and amenities
across the region. Visitor infrastructure is ageing and
uneven across the towns; car park charging in some
but not all locations; toilets are a key concern
COMMUNITY ASSETS
Impressive volunteer led portfolio in key locations –
eg Forres, Cullen, Findhorn and the Cabrach; less
evident in other locations; significant potential
PEOPLE & PLAYERS
Key locations enjoy dedicated, creative, resilient
volunteer activity but fatigue issues evident in many
communities; demise of VMS has left a vital
leadership gap and opportunity
SENSE OF PLACE
Strong locally in general but fragmented regionally;
several places and place names not well known or
understood outwith the region; Moray is a relatively
new
entity and does not yet have a cohesive identity
ACTIVITIES & EXPERIENCES
Strong potential for varied water and land-based
activities and emerging focus on agritourism
experiences; weak coordination, packaging and
visibility
VISITOR INFO
& SIGNAGE
Universal frustration with inconsistency; several
examples of community led visitor information
provision filling gaps and offering potential; signage
is generally poor and inconsistent
DIGITAL PRESENCE & MARKETING
Some strong local platforms and individual business
activity; major concern that VMS digital presence is
still live but no longer proactively managed and its
future is unknown
CLIMATE ACTION
Mixed EV roll out, reliability and awareness – needs
coordination; only some towns and communities
have climate action plans; no entries on the
Tourism
Cares map, 20 Green Tourism
accredited
accommodation providers and attractions in Moray
INCLUSION
& ACCESSIBILITY
Minimal all-access and inclusion provision/
welcome; scope for region wide approach and
collaborations/itineraries
DESTINATION
COLLABORATION
Major structural gap especially since VMS closure;
concern VMS model wasn’t inclusive for community
interests; collaboration within individual towns/
communities is inconsistent and is weak across
Moray
SCOTO
PRESS PAUSE® DESTINATION
COMPETENCE APPRAISAL
Local strength
Improvement needed
Major weakness
COMPETENCY RATING
12 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
Moray Place by Place
Press Pause® Destination
Competency Appraisal 2025
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 13
Page 95

Page 96

THE CASE FOR
CHANGE
OUR CORE INSIGHT
When time is taken to understand Moray, it
becomes clear that the region already has the core
ingredients of a compelling destination. Moray has a
long-standing tradition of tourism
and hospitality, a
strong sense of place at a local level, and a rich
mix of natural, cultural and heritage assets that are
intrinsic to the area and deeply valued by those who
live and work here.
Across Moray’s towns, villages and landscapes
there are notable strengths in tourism
tradition,
arts, culture and heritage, wildlife and nature. The
area offers a diverse and contrasting mix of coastal
holiday parks, beaches and fishing harbours, rural
towns and villages, rivers and forests, hills and
mountains, traditional country sports, golf and a
globally recognised whisky sector.
Moray benefits from
exceptional building blocks
that do not need to be created or imported. Its
landscapes are calm
and restorative, its food
and drink offer is of high quality, its cultural and
creative endeavour is active and evolving, and its
communities demonstrate strong volunteer effort,
pride of place and commitment to welcoming
visitors.
Moray is therefore a destination which has
exceptional assets across its geography, but it is
currently on the fringe, is under-connected, under-
promoted and under-supported. A destination
which lacks its own cohesive and coherent narrative
and identity of its own. Inspiration and information
are inconsistent across the visitor journey, and
there is no clear, shared narrative to help visitors
understand how
Moray fits together as a place to
explore, stay and return to.
Moray’s key weaknesses therefore lie not in what
if offers but in how
it operates and how
it presents
itself to the outside world. While collaboration
within some towns and communities is strong,
collaboration between communities, and between
local interests and external partners, is uneven and
often limited.
Addressing these gaps requires a new, place-led
approach to leadership and collaboration, enabling
Moray to connect its assets, build confidence
and function as a coherent destination in its own
right offering an authentic and high-quality visitor
experience.
MORAY’S REGIONAL IDENTITY
Engagement revealed practical tension rather than
deep division around how
Moray is presented.
Businesses often favour Moray Speyside for its
whisky equity, international recognition and digital
search value, while residents and community
groups tend to prefer Moray for its inclusivity,
simplicity and alignment with the council area. 
This strategy moves beyond the debate by
positioning Moray as the unifying regional identity,
recognising Speyside as one globally recognised
strand within a broader, more diverse destination
story.
Positioning Speyside alongside Moray’s Coast,
Heritage, Culture, Nature and Warm
Community
Spirit within a single, cohesive brand allows the
strategy to honour world-renowned strengths
without any single theme dominating, offering
visitors multiple ways to discover and engage while
reflecting the region’s genuine diversity.
EVIDENCING
THE VALUE OF
TOURISM
IN
MORAY
While available data provides a strong picture of
Moray’s domestic and repeat visitor markets, there
is currently limited and inconsistent data relating
specifically to premium
and international visitors.
Much of what is understood about these markets
is drawn from
proxy indicators such as whisky
tourism, golf, country sports and high-end retail,
alongside anecdotal evidence from
businesses and
lived experience rather than robust, destination-
level intelligence.
This data gap limits Moray’s ability to clearly
evidence the scale, behaviour and value of premium
and international travel, reinforcing the need for
improved data capture, shared insight and stronger
connections with the travel trade as part of the
Strategy’s early actions.
Moreover, the data that does exist is modelled and is
limited to the ‘size’ of tourism
in terms of footfall,
overnight stays and spend whereas data that
demonstrates how
tourism
is benefitting Moray’s
communities, businesses and environment will
ensure it is perceived as a force for good.
LOCAL AMBITION
AND
READINESS FOR CHANGE
Realistic optimism
was evidenced across all
stakeholder engagement. There is confidence in
Moray and stakeholders are seeking destination
leadership, a joined-up game plan, an enabling
framework for enterprise, investment and growth,
a clear, consistent and compelling narrative,
and investment in destination coordination and
collaboration.
W
HY CHANGE IS NEEDED NOW
Moray is entering a period of renewed opportunity.
Strategic public and private investment are
underway and increasingly focused on place,
infrastructure, culture, food and drink and visitor
experience.
In addition, Moray is home to several globally
recognised brands whose reach and reputation
contribute to the area’s international profile and
appeal. This Strategy seeks to better integrate these
global assets with Moray’s wider visitor economy,
strengthening connections with local businesses,
food and drink producers, cultural organisations
and communities. Better connecting these assets
and enterprises offers the potential to translate
global appeal into more locally rooted benefit.
Together, these factors make clear that Moray does
not need to reinvent itself as a destination. What is
required is a new, place-led approach to leadership,
collaboration and storytelling—
one that connects
Moray’s existing assets, people and ambition into a
coherent and confident whole, and ensures tourism
works for Moray rather than simply happening to it.
The key to unlocking Moray’s future
and realising its potential as a distinct
destination in Scotland lies
with the people and the businesses of
Moray coming together with one voice
and one game plan.
14 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
Refer to Moray Tourism
2036 - How
We Got Here
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 15
Page 96

Page 97

OUR SIX 
STRATEGIC 
PILLARS
THE HEART OF THE STRATEGY –
W
HAT W
E FOCUS ON
Six principles translate Moray’s shared values
into practical behaviours that will guide decision-
making, investment, product development and
leadership over the next decade.
They reflect local lived experience while aligning
with the national shift toward value-led, place-
based and wellbeing-focused tourism
set out in
Scotland Outlook 2030 and related strategies.
MORAY’S PILLARS FOR ACTION
Leadership &
Coordination
- A light-touch,
inclusive,
enabling model
that reconnects
and drives
Moray.
- Purpose
Rebuild 
inclusive,
trusted
destination
leadership.
- Early Priorities
Establish 
Tourism 
Leadership
Group; interim
coordination
team; strategic
partnerships.
- Outcome by
2036
A sustainable,
community-
rooted
destination
body with clear
accountability.
Identity, Brand
& Promotion
- A compelling
narrative that
ties Moray’s
places and
assets together
to inspire
responsible
visits that
resonate
and connect.
- Purpose
Create a clear,
shared
narrative for
Moray.
- Early Priorities
Agree core
story; stabilise
digital
presence;
unified events
calendar.
- Outcome by
2036
A confident,
coherent
identity
consistently
communicated
by all.
Enterprise &
Investment
- An inspirational
framework to
support Moray’s
enterprises,
people and
places to grow
with confidence
and purpose.
- Purpose
Enable local
enterprise to
grow
with
confidence and
purpose.
- Early Priorities
Support
bookable
experiences;
strengthen local
supply chains;
skills and fair
work focus.
- Outcome by
2036
A resilient,
diverse visitor
economy
rooted in local
benefit.
Community
Benefit &
Resilience
- Meaningful
connection
between
visitors,
communities
and
enterprise
empowering
Moray’s people
and places to
flourish.
- Purpose
Ensure tourism
strengthens
everyday life
in Moray.
- Early Priorities
Community-
led priorities;
smallscale
enabling
investments;
volunteer
support.
- Outcome by
2036
Visible social,
cultural and
economic
benefit for
communities.
Visitor
Experience &
Dispersal
- Shaping
Moray’s
visitor offer to
support
responsible
growth,
dispersal
and year-round
value.
- Purpose
Shape
responsible,
year round
visitor
experiences.
- Early Priorities
Develop
themed
clusters;
improve
information and
wayfinding;
encourage
longer stays.
- Outcome by
2036
Longer stays,
wider dispersal
and deeper
visitor
engagement.
Environment &
Infrastructure
- Strategic
investment that
enables
connectivity
and protects
place and
the planet.
- Purpose
Protect place
while
enabling
responsible
access.
- Early Priorities
Improve core
infrastructure;
visitor
management;
climate-aware
investment.
- Outcome by
2036
Healthy
environments,
reduced
pressure points
and long-term
resilience.
The Moray Pillars for Action reflect local lived
experience while aligning with the national shift
toward value-led, place-based and wellbeing-
focused tourism
set out in Scotland Outlook 2030
and related strategies.
16 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
Moray Tourism
2036
Refer to Moray Tourism
2036 - The Ten Year Strategy Explained
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 17
Page 97

Page 98

OUR PRIORITY 
MARKETS
OUR PRIORITY MARKETS
PRIORITY SEGMENTS
Four priority segments reflect the duality of Moray’s current visitor profile, local aspirations
and national opportunity.
PRIORITY SEGMENTS
SEGMENTS
W
HO
THEY ARE
Slow
Adventurers &
Nature Seekers
Domestic and short-haul visitors who choose
low-impact, slower-paced travel drawn by
wildlife, coast, rivers, dark skies and outdoors
Encourages shoulder-season travel, dispersed
exploration and stewardship-led experiences
Families & 
Multi-Generational
Families, often visiting friends and relatives
(VFR) and repeat trips seeking safe, accessible
places and shared experiences in towns,
villages and along the coast
Supports year-round value in local services
and facilities, especially in towns and smaller
communities
Premium
International 
& Specialist Interests
High-value, low volume travellers (notably 
North America/Europe) seeking bespoke whisky, 
golf, fishing and country sport experiences
Focuses on premium
curated itineraries
featuring local produce and experiences with
local small-scale operators
Culture & Heritage
Explorers
Visitors motivated by history, archaeology,
arts & festivals
Drives longer dwell time and deeper
engagement with Moray’s heritage, culture and
creative economy
W
HY IT MATTERS FOR MORAY/
OPPORTUNITIES FOR MORAY
18 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
Refer to Moray Tourism
2036 - The Ten Year Strategy Explained
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 19
Available data suggests Moray’s visitor economy is
shaped by:
•
Strong domestic demand
•
High repeat visitation
•
Deep emotional attachment to place
However, lived experience confirms that Moray 
also enjoys a significant premium
international
market linked to whisky, golf, country sports and
specialist retail.
These combine as a dual market profile creating
valuable opportunities to focus less on volume and
more on value, quality and year-round local benefit.
MORAY’S DUAL MARKET
Domestic, repeat,
experience-seeking visitors
Families, couples and individuals plus
people visiting friends and relatives
who value the great outdoors, heritage,
authenticity and calm. 
Opportunity: longer stays and 
deeper engagement.
High-spend, low-volume visitors
linked to whisky, golf, heritage and
curated experiences. 
Opportunity: premium
itineraries and
stronger local supply chains.
Premium, international
and specialist interests
Core Market
Core Market
OTHER IMPORTANT SEGMENTS
Touring Visitors
Often pass through on wider
Scottish itineraries. 
Opportunity: convert pass-through
to overnight stays.
Business &
Extended Stays
Temporary workers and events &
training visitors extending their stays. 
Opportunity: enhanced 
mid-week stays, leisure and 
town-based spend.
Page 98

Page 99

MORAY’S 
EXPERIENCE 
CLUSTERS
HOW
OUR VISITORS 
EXPERIENCE MORAY
Moray’s diverse offer can be organised into
five interconnected “experience clusters”.
These are not campaigns but structural
foundations that reflect the region’s
identity pillars and relevance to the priority
segments. These provide the basis for product
development and infrastructure investment.
Each cluster is designed to:
Drive shoulder season
growth
Connect communities,
businesses and assets
Strengthen and join up what
Moray already does well
Fill gaps evident from
engagement
Spark entrepreneurial
ideas
Support micro-businesses
and community groups
Align with the new
narrative for Moray
20 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
EXPERIENCE
CLUSTER
W
HY IT 
MATTERS
PRIORITIES
COASTS, HARBOURS
AND MARINE LIFE
The coast is Moray’s most distinctive 
asset but remains underpromoted
and underinterpreted
1. Moray Coastal Trail Enhancement
2. Coastal Wellbeing and Watersports
3. Harbours as Story Hubs
4. Marine Wildlife Experiences
5. Coastal Accessibility
Whisky is the global anchor but its
connection to place, people, food and
heritage in Moray is underdeveloped
1. Whisky Villages Experience
2. Taste of Moray Trail
3. Maker & Craft Routes
4
Premium
Story-Rich Offer
5. Community Connections
Moray’s historical and cultural depth is
exceptional but poorly connected
across the destination and modestly
promoted
1. Moray Stories Network
2. Heritage Trail Network
3. Creative Moray Programme
4. Cultural Events Calendar
5. Interpretation Upgrades
NATURE, OUTDOORS &
W
ELLBEING
Moray’s resources for outdoor
activities on land and water are
significant but underdeveloped,
underpromoted and underconnected.
Golf and Country Sports are at a
premium
level but offered in isolation
to the wider Moray offer
1. Dark Skies & Northern Lights
2. Trail Experiences
3. Wellbeing Moray
4. Moray ‘More Than’ Golf  & Country 
Sport Days
5. Wildlife & Conservation
6. Accessible Infrastructure
TOW
NS, VILLAGES &
COMMUNITIES
Strong identities and considerable
volunteer effort, but towns and
villages feel ‘invisible’.  Communities
want visibility, pride and revitalisation
1. Town Story Maps
2. Community Experience Programme
3. Town Centre Regeneration Alignment
4. Local Walks and Trails
5. Visitor Services Support
OUR EXPERIENCE CLUSTERS EXPLAINED
W
HISKY, FOOD, DRINK AND
CRAFTMANSHIP
HERITAGE CULTURE &
CREATIVITY
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 21
Page 99

Page 100

COLLABORATIVE 
MARKETING
AND
PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT
GUIDANCE 
FOR DELIVERY
How
We Promote and Package Moray
PRIORITY THEMES
Moray already demonstrates strong collaboration
through its signature events, festivals and place-
based initiatives. These activities provide a solid
foundation for developing more joined-up products,
shared storytelling and coordinated promotion that
can strengthen Moray’s offer, extend the season and
support wider dispersal.
The following collaborative themes are not new
attractions, but ways of connecting existing
strengths, enabling communities, businesses and
partners to work together around shared narratives
and experiences, and collaborative product
development.
HOW
W
E MAKE THIS HAPPEN
In the absence of a destination organisation,
Guidance for Delivery is provided to support the
initial steps and set out a road map that can evolve
as momentum
builds.
Delivery of Moray Tourism
2036 will be phased,
partnership-led and responsive to Moray’s capacity
and context. Actions will build on existing strengths,
collaborations and initiatives, supported by
Guidance for Delivery that sets out priorities, roles
and sequencing in more detail. This approach
ensures the Strategy is current, practical and
adaptable whilst focusing on long-term
impact.
A LEADERSHIP STRUCTURE
Given the current void in leadership, a phased
approach to establishing a new
and agile destination
leadership and collaboration structure is set out.
The first priority is inviting interest in creating a lean
and agile tourism
leadership group(TLG) comprising
a small cohort of local industry leaders who
represent the breadth of the offer and geography.
This TLG will provide the voice of the industry and
lead the scoping and transition to a robust and
sustainable destination leadership structure for
Moray which will provide an authoritative and
cohesive industry overview
as this strategy is
implemented in full.
In parallel a Moray Strategic Tourism
Partnership
(STP) is proposed bringing the TLG together with key
agency and support players, notably but not
restricted to the council, VisitScotland, Highlands
and Islands Enterprise, CNPA, FSB, Business
Gateway, DYW
and the Moray Chamber of
Commerce. This partnership will champion Moray
Tourism
2036 and growth of the visitor economy. In
the early stages the STP is where strategic priorities
will be agreed, support mechanisms developed, and
new
opportunities harnessed. 
Its inter-relationship with and involvement in
the new
destination leadership structure will be
reviewed over time.
A forum
structure is then recommended to ensure
geographic and themed interests have robust
mechanisms to engage in tourism
policy, activity
and decision making.
A BLENDED FUNDING
MODEL
Scotland’s destination organisations are funded
through many different mechanisms. In Moray a
blended model is recommended drawing funds from
a range of sources and evolving over time, ensuring
businesses, agencies and communities can readily
engage and have a voice. This blended model
acknowledges the limitations the previous BID and
any membership model provides where it focuses on
the interests of members rather than the destination
as an entity.
Moray Council has begun the pre-consultation stage
on a potential Visitor Levy. This is an initial stage
only, and no decisions have been taken; the levy
may or may not progress. This Strategy neither
assumes nor proposes a Visitor Levy. If a levy were
ever to be introduced, it could form
one of several
potential funding sources to help support the long-
term
delivery of elements of this Strategy.
MORAY TOURISM
LEADERSHIP GROUP
Tourism
Industry
Leadership Group
Transitions To Become
New
DMMO
MORAY STRATEGIC
TOURISM
PARTNERSHIP
TLG/DMMO
Agency Partners (MC, 
VS, HIE, CNPA)
Industry (MCC)
Support Partners 
(FSB, BG, DYW
)
MORAY 
TOURISM
FORUMS
Themed - Heritage, Food &
Drink, Outdoor Activities,
Events and Festivals
Place Based - Moray
Communities
SPIRIT OF
SPEYSIDE – 
FROM
FESTIVAL
TO
CONNECTED 
W
HISKY 
EXPERIENCES
Building on the
festival’s success
to link distilleries
with food,
accommodation,
heritage and 
communities,
encouraging longer
stays and deeper
exploration across
Moray.
ARTS & 
CULTURE –
CONNECTING
CREATIVE
MORAY
Bringing together
festivals, makers,
venues and 
contemporary
culture through
shared storytelling
and seasonal
programming to
strengthen visibility
and local creative
economies.
MORAY W
ALKING 
& OUTDOOR
FESTIVAL –
SHARED 
EXPERIENCES,
YEAR-ROUND
VALUE
Expanding
collaborative
walking, outdoor
and wellbeing
experiences that
support slower
travel, wider
dispersal and off-
peak visitation.
TOURS & TRAILS
– JOINED-UP
JOURNEYS 
ACROSS MORAY
Connecting coast,
heritage, food and
drink, nature and
communities into
trails presenting
coherent themed
journeys that make
Moray easier to
explore and give
reasons to stay
longer.
GOLF –
CONNECTING
BEYOND
THE
COURSE
Extending golf
visits by linking
courses and the
timing of the golf
experience with
local food, culture,
landscape and
other outdoor
experiences 
to deliver higher
value and broader
local benefit.
22 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
Refer to Moray Tourism
2036 - Guidance for Delivery
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 23
Page 100

Page 101

Our Vision: By 2036, Moray will be recognised
as a leading example of place-based, community
powered, responsible tourism. A place where
outstanding global brands and local enterprise
thrive together and tourism
enriches local
life, strengthens communities, enhances and
celebrates nature and culture, and offers visitors
meaningful experiences across all seasons.
OUR STRATEGIC
FRAMEWORK
2026-36
OUR GUIDING
PRINCIPLES
A JOINED-UP
PLACE LED
PROPOSITION
A RENEW
ED
PLACE
NARRATIVE
A CONFIDENT
FOUNDATION
FOR ENTERPRISE
AND PROSPERITY
A W
ELLBEING
ECONOMY 
LENS
COMMUNITIES
AS PARTNERS
NOT
SPECTATORS
STEWARDSHIP
FIRST
Connecting
Moray’s hidden
assets with its
global brands/
linking place
and people as
one coherent
destination
Principles What matters Our approach
A collegiate, agile
and transparent
destination
management
model that
represents
businesses,
communities,
global brands and
volunteer groups
Rooted in Moray’s
landscape,
people, culture,
creativity and
contrasts
A strong, place-
rooted cohesive
story guides how
Moray presents
itself and how
businesses and
communities
collaborate
translating
into authentic
memorable
experiences
Creating an
environment
for enterprise to
invest and grow
with clarity and
confidence
Tourism
empowers
businesses and
communities
to invest with
confidence,
supporting fair
work, skills
and resilient
workforce
Tourism
as a
driver of local
pride, resilience,
and fair work
balancing people,
places and profit
Tourism
growth
should be
supported by
the essential
infrastructure
that serves both
residents and
visitors
Recognising local
organisations,
charities, social
enterprises
and volunteers
as essential
contributors
Visitors feel
connected
through
authentic,
place-based
experiences
developed
collaboratively
and delivered
by proud local
people
Tourism
that
strengthens
everyday life,
protects Moray’s
landscapes and
delivers long-
term
value for
communities,
businesses and
visitors
Growth is paced
to local capacity,
with investment
in infrastructure,
environment
and visitor
management
coming before
promotion
OUR 
DELIVERY FRAMEW
ORKS
DESTINATION
LEADERSHIP IN
MORAY 
5 Delivery
Charters
DESTINATION
COLLABORATION
& EARLY ACTIONS
IN MORAY
MORAY’S
IDENTITY
BRAND AND
PROMOTION
ENTERPRISE AND
INVESTMENT IN
MORAY
COMMUNITY
BENEFIT AND
RESILIENCE
ACROSS MORAY
MORAY’S
PRODUCT AND
EXPERIENCE
CLUSTERS
INFRASTRUCTURE
INVESTMENT IN
MORAY
CLIMATE, NATURE
STEWARDSHIP 
IN MORAY
What we will doOUR PILLARS FOR ACTION
Destination
Leadership &
Coordination
A light-touch,
inclusive, enabling
model that
reconnects and
drives Moray
Identity, Brand &
Promotion
A compelling
narrative that ties
Moray’s places
and assets
together to inspire
responsible visits
that resonate &
connect
Enterprise &
Investment
An inspirational
framework to
support Moray’s
enterprises,
people and places
to grow with
confidence and
purpose
Community
Benefit &
Resilience
Meaningful
connections
between visitors,
communities
& enterprise
empowering
Moray’s people &
places to flourish
Visitors
Experience &
Dispersal
Shaping Moray’s
visitor offer
to support
responsible
growth, dispersal
and year-round
value
Environment &
Infrastructure
Strategic
investment
that enables
connectivity and
protects place 
and the planet
Our priorities
24 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
OUR STRATEGIC
FRAMEW
ORK 2026-36
HOW
W
E ORGANISE DELIVERY
Eight delivery frameworks are provided to guide the
implementation of this strategy and ensure a clear
and robust road map is in place which can be
amended and will evolve as time progresses.
At its core Moray Tourism
2036 provides a strategic
framework for
• 
A two-year transition towards new
destination 
leadership and governance Co-designing an 
inclusive leadership model with strategic 
partners.
•
An immediate focus on collaborative marketing 
and product development 
Encouraging greater collaboration around Moray’s 
current strengths to elevate the offer and energise
the players.
• 
A living, agile strategy
Designed to adapt, responsive to the priorities of 
Moray and its businesses and communities 
over time.
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 25
Page 101

Page 102

1. Destination leadership in Moray
Leadership,
Partnerships &
Governance
Creating a connected,
confident and
collaborative model
for destination
development,
management and
promotion
Phased
implementation
A phased approach
that builds 
confidence, capacity
and momentum
Measurement
Tracking what
matters —
and
demonstrating value
to communities
Resourcing
A fair, transparent 
and sustainable
funding approach
Monitoring Review
and Refresh Cycles
A living strategy
guided by real data
and real voices.
2. Destination collaboration and early
actions in Moray
To build momentum, confidence and connection
across Moray’s visitor economy by enabling
practical, inclusive and place-based collaboration
from
the outset of the strategy.
3. Moray’s identity, brand & promotion
To create a clear, confident and authentic identity
for Moray that reflects its people, places and stories
while ensuring the region is visible and discoverable
to audiences aligned with its values.
4. Enterprise & investment in Moray
To strengthen Moray’s visitor economy as a driver of
inclusive, place-based economic growth by
supporting enterprises to adapt, collaborate and
invest with confidence.
5. Community benefit & resilience 
across Moray
To ensure tourism
strengthens local life across
Moray by supporting community-led priorities,
sustaining volunteer endeavour, enabling fair work,
and reinvesting in the places, services and people
that make Moray distinctive.
6. Moray’s product & experience clusters
A joined-up approach to strengthening, connecting
and elevating Moray’s offer.
7. Infrastructure & investment  
across Moray
To build the foundational infrastructure required
for Moray to function confidently as a community
powered, responsible destination.
8. Climate nature & stewardship 
across Moray
To protect what makes Moray special; safeguarding
landscapes, coastlines, habitats and heritage
responding to climate impacts while enabling
responsible, low-impact visitor experiences.
OUR PHASED 
DELIVERY PLAN
OUR EIGHT DELIVERY
FRAMEWORKS
Initial Steps (First 6–9 months)
Three simple steps will kickstart the delivery of this
strategy:
1. Establish the tourism
leadership group and   
strategic tourism
partnership.
2.  Assume management of the existing website and 
digital channels and develop a digital
marketing plan & events calendar.
3.  Appoint a contractor/freelance team
providing
• 
a coordinator to support the TLG in its 
deliberations and actions, engage the industry 
and provide basic admin support.
• 
a digital marketeer to develop and manage the 
digital assets and digital content.
• 
a destination development manager to 
progress the collaborative initiatives and 
product development.
Phase 1 (2026–2028) —
Stabilisation
Focus: coordination, infrastructure, narrative, 
early wins.
• 
New
destination leadership model scoped out
• 
Place branding and narrative for Moray developed
• 
Collaborative initiatives delivered
• 
Bookable experience clusters developed
• 
Annual tourism
conference
• 
First Tourism
Dashboard published
• 
Visible infrastructure improvements
Phase 2 (2028–2031) —
Integration & Growth
Focus: product development, experience depth,
collaboration.
• 
Destination leadership structure resourced 
and launched
• 
Full trails development, wayfinding & 
signage rollout
• 
Bookable experience clusters expanded.
• 
Major cultural & heritage interpretation upgrades
Phase 3 (2031–2036) —
Maturity & Leadership
Focus: national leadership, premium
experiences,
regenerative tourism.
• 
Midpoint review
of Moray Tourism
2036
• 
Premium
story-rich experiences
• 
Integrated transport & visitor management
• 
Permanent destination body
• 
Effective measurement and storytelling of   
tourism
impacts and benefits
26 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
Refer to Moray Tourism
2036 - Guidance for Delivery
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 27
Page 102

Page 103

MEASURING
OUR SUCCESS
W
HAT SUCCESS LOOKS LIKE 
IN
2036
By 2036, success for Moray’s visitor economy is
defined by confidence, connection and shared
benefit rather than scale or volume. Moray is
recognised as a coherent, place-led destination,
connected through a clear and authentic shared
narrative.
A lean, inclusive and trusted coordination
model enables collaboration across businesses,
communities and partners, supporting confident
enterprise, stronger local supply chains and clearer
pathways to support. Communities experience
visible social, cultural and economic benefit from
tourism, with volunteer effort and community
leadership recognised, supported and sustained.
Investment in infrastructure, visitor management
and digital visibility has improved everyday
experience for residents and visitors, reducing
pressure points and strengthening year-round
value. Visitors are encouraged to stay longer,
explore more widely and engage more deeply, while
tourism
contributes meaningfully to fair work, skills
development and youth opportunity.
Growth is measured, responsible and climate-
aware, supporting nature recovery, place
stewardship and long-term
resilience. And Moray
has a confident voice within Scotland’s tourism
landscape as a practical example of community-
powered, place-based tourism
that works for
people, place and prosperity.
A bespoke Moray Tourism
Dashboard is
recommended, designed to support transparency.
Key considerations will be gauging sentiment and
demonstrating progress in:
Environment and
Stewardship
Business 
resilience
Visitor experience 
and satisfaction
Community 
benefit
Collaboration and
coordination
“BY 2036, SUCCESS
FOR MORAY’S VISITOR
ECONOMY IS DEFINED
BY CONFIDENCE,
CONNECTION
AND
SHARED BENEFIT
RATHER THAN
SCALE
OR VOLUME.”
KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS
Visitor Experience
& Satisfaction
Visitor satisfaction
digital engagement
itinerary usage
repeat visitation
shoulder season
occupancy
Business 
Health
Business barometer
revenue stability
across seasons
workforce retention
and living wage
employers local
supply chain usage
number of bookable
experiences
Community 
Benefit
Number of
community projects
funded volunteer
hours supported
improvements to
toilets, signage,
trails community
satisfaction metrics
youth participation
numbers
Environment &
Stewardship
Ranger reports
waste reduction
EV charging use
active travel metrics
biodiversity
engagement
initiatives
Collaboration &
Coordination
TLG
meeting
frequency
forum
participation
annual conference
engagement
cross-sector
collaboration
outcomes
response times for
issues raised
28 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 29
Page 103

Page 104

MORAY 
SPEAKING 
FOR ITSELF
“MORAY ISN’T LOUD – IT
WHISPERS. BUT IF YOU
LISTEN
CLOSELY, IT TELLS
THE KIND OF STORY THAT
STAYS WITH YOU...”
Moray lies between the
Scottish Highlands,
rural Aberdeenshire,
and the Cairngorms
National Park. Moray
Tourism
2036 does not
seek to compete, but
to offer a distinctive
alternative—
one rooted
in Moray’s people,
places and values, and
confident enough
to stand alongside
neighbouring
destinations as a
complementary and
collaborative partner.
Through renewed leadership, stronger collaboration
and a phased approach to delivery, Moray can
steadily amplify its own voice while working
constructively with neighbours to strengthen
regional journeys, shared itineraries and mutual
benefit. In doing so, Moray becomes easier to
discover, easier to understand and easier to value—
on its own terms.
This strategy is not about making Moray something it
is not. It is about revealing what Moray already is:
quietly exceptional, quietly creative and quietly
welcoming. It provides the framework for Moray to
be heard and to be visited by people who value what
is on offer, engage with care and curiosity, and
contribute positively to the places and communities
they encounter.
In doing so, Moray Tourism
2036 ensures tourism
delivers benefits that matter to local people,
supporting communities, strengthening enterprise
and protecting the places that make Moray special,
now
and into the future.
30 | Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy
Moray Tourism
2036 | The 10 Year Strategy | 31
Page 104

Page 105

The development of this Tourism Strategy has been supported by funding from the UK
Government through the UK Shared Prosperity Fund (for more information visit UK Shared
Prosperity Fund), Visit Moray & Speyside Ltd and Highlands and Islands Enterprise
This strategy has been developed and produced by SCOTO CIC based on SCOTO’s PressPause ® methodology. 
Our thanks to all who engaged in the process and freely shared their passion and insights ensuring this strategy directly
responds to their local lived experience and ambition.
Connected. Supported. Promoted
Moray Tourism 2036
Page 105

Page 106

Appendix 2 
Moray Tourism
2036 Public Consultation Data 
Response
ID
Responded
at
Q1. W
hat are your overall impressions of the draft
Moray Tourism
2036 Strategy?
Q2. How
well do you think
the Strategy reflects
Moray’s identity, needs and
opportunities?
Q3. Please share any additional comments, ideas or suggestions.
Response
4617743
2026-03-18
17:42:55
It is deficient, in that recognition of the importance of
diverse 
Cultural activities and a thriving cultural network
has not been given sufficient weight, whilst developing a
leadership group for tourism
and neglecting much
needed cultural leadersip
Lacks recognition of the
symbiotic link and need for
leadership in the cultural
sectir
Consider creating one leadership group covering Tourism
and Culture in Moray, place greater
emphasis on the visitor levy as the source of future funding
The strategy is designed to work
across all sectors within tourism. The
cultural sector is recognised as a core
part of the tourism
strategy however
no single sector should dominate the
overall focus. The strategy also aims
to support businesses of all sizes.  
The proposed leadership model is
intentionally cross-sectoral, enabling
strong cultural representation.
With no decision on a visitor levy for
Moray, no assumption could be given
to this.
4617751
2026-03-18
17:47:01
Fix the potholes 
Fix the potholes 
Fix the potholes 
Specific maintenance issues sit within
wider operational responsibilities.
4617829
2026-03-18
18:53:23
Excellent summary and forward vision, Moray does
whisper.
Very well, we have so much
to offer but....
........ visitors and workers need somewhere to stay. 
As a priority, a good quality hotel is required in Forres to increase bed space and therefore footfall.
Visitor accommodation in Forres is in a dire state at the moment i.e. very little. 
Collaboration with, and encouragement to, a national brand to develop a site in the town would be
a good outcome, before 2036. 
Thanks,
A Forresian
The need to strengthen visitor
accommodation, including quality and
capacity, is reflected within the
Enterprise & Investment pillar,
supporting targeted development to
enable year-round growth. 
4617929
2026-03-18
20:12:09
Good overall
Reflected well
Several acronyms in the document that are not explained anywhere
Not immediately clear what the actual actions to be taken are
Apologies a glossary was not included.
Actions are set out within the
Guidance for Delivery document, and
this will be published once the
strategy is approved. 
4619444
2026-03-19
15:57:59
Overall good thinking but how
many will can be
implemented !
Great - but.
The roads in Moray - not around Elgin - but around Buckie are treacherous for the amount of traffic
now
- Great we have a thriving economy, harbour now
utilized for Windfarm
and construction.
Harbour road is treacherous - HGV are ripping it up, many discussions for repair improving nothing
done! It is virtually unsafe for locals to pass never mind any tourists, pothole city, several buildings
decay - glass windows falling on pavement from
a height! Entry exit from
both A98 junctions Buckie
and Buckpool a joke! Why is Buckie left out so much? School repairs, road repairs. The revenue
brought in per each town should proportionally spent in each town! Buckie has windfarm
activity,
engineering at harbour, fishing and a thriving Maltens plant either side of town ( hence increased
HGV traffic) but the people do not see any infrastructure upgrade to maintain support this! We
should do more to promote, entice cyclists and walkers but also have the roads/paths suitable for
such.
Delivery is supported through a
phased implementation plan and early
priority actions. Local infrastructure
concerns are recognised within the
Environment & Infrastructure pillar,
though specific maintenance issues
sit within operational responsibilities 
4620094
2026-03-19
20:51:36
The strategy is promising and focused on Moray tourism
rebirth. 
We welcome the positive feedback.
4620099
2026-03-19
20:56:02
The strategy seems strong and focus on longer stays and
loyal travellers. Definitely, a focus on bringing the local
travel trade together is very important. I believe the
development of local workforce in order to attend the
future demand is needed.
I think Moray doesn’t need
only VFR market and
Premium 
The strategy identifies a dual market
approach.  It takes a balanced
approach, focusing on value alongside
volume, with multiple target segments
including families, domestic visitors,
touring markets and premium
visitors. 
Page 106

Page 107

Appendix 2 
Moray Tourism
2036 Public Consultation Data 
4620100
2026-03-19
20:57:22 
I think Moray doesn’t need
only premium
Internacional
market and VFR market ….
Moray needs volume too
and middle range visitors
who are willing to spend
here. The issue is the lack of 
The strategy identifies a dual market
approach.  It takes a balanced
approach, focusing on value alongside
volume, with multiple target segments
including families, domestic visitors,
touring markets and premium
visitors
4620142
2026-03-19
21:29:43
Pages 24-29 are useful.
A good overall helicopter
view, identifying all the main
elements of the Scottish
tourism, proposition. 
How
will this activity on page 27 be paid for? 
What vehicle is proposed?
The strategy proposes a phased
leadership model and a blended
funding approach. Detailed delivery
mechanisms are outlined in the
Guidance for Delivery document,
including governance and
coordination structures.
Page 107

Page 108

Appendix 2 
Moray Tourism
2036 Public Consultation Data 
4620185
2026-03-19
22:16:42
Good. I seems comprehensive and inspirational but
rather glosses over the 'real world' challenges our region
faces.
Pretty well. From
my
perspective & experience I
disagree that international
visitors are ‘low
volume’.
The majority – or at least a
substantial proportion – I
see in and around Dufftown
/ Speyside are from
abroad. 
I feel that the main failure large and significantly exceptional parts our region have been overlooked
comes being in the shadow
of the Cairngorm
National Park. The fact this is defined and promoted by
a hard line boundary puts all the focus on it and a cliff edge for adjacent almost as exceptional
landscape areas and offerings. 
I put much of the blame for a currently poor strategy for promoting national and regional tourism
on
the Scottish Government – exercised through under funding at a local level and a glossy Visit
Scotland organisation that appears to be online only and no longer engaged on the ground.
Additionally their unwillingness to recognise the impacts their sledgehammer bureaucratic policies
(tax, business rates, licensing & levies) and enabling of almost uncontrolled onshore windfarm
and
associated infrastructure development is already having, and determination not to reconsider or
amend these. 
I feel that morale within the self catering holiday accommodation industry – in 8 years of our
involvement – has never been lower as it is now. 
Regrettably windfarm
over-development in the Cabrach and Upper Glenfiddich is already pushing
the area beyond a reasonable threshold of acceptable landscape change, and further schemes are
about to cumulatively destroy the nationally important whisky and heritage story contained within it.
They will impact fragile community regeneration efforts, the tourism
offer, and small local
businesses in ways that are now
difficult or impossible to reverse for many generations to come. 
For us this initiative has come too late.
I am
a whisky history expert (www.whiskyarchaeologist.scot) , currently preparing for publication
the extraordinary and nationally important story of how
illicit distilling in the Cabrach and Glenlivet
area of Moray laid the foundations for the modern Scotch whisky industry we know
today, and this
work depends fundamentally on the continuing integrity and legibility of that landscape setting. The
Cabrach community and the Cabrach Trust are seeking to rebuild a depleted population and local
economy by using this landscape-based story – in situ archaeology, historic routes, castles and
whisky narratives – as the foundation for sustainable regeneration, but successive large wind farms
and associated grid infrastructure are progressively eroding the very qualities and authenticity they
rely on. 
This includes impact on our own top-rated holiday accommodation business close to Auchindoun
Castle, consistently ranked in the top 1%
on Airbnb and rated “Exceptional” on VRBO, which
depends on the visual quality, tranquillity and reputation of the Upper Glenfiddich–Cabrach
landscape. Its viability is now
under mounting pressure from
years of construction traffic, road and
landscape impacts associated with windfarms, combined with rising costs and administrative
burdens, not least  from
the short-term
let licensing regime that has been applied.  Now
there is the
prospect of a visitor levy and this will further dampen demand, add more administrative burden for
us and, as the business already provides just a very modest income in our retirement, undoubtably
hasten our withdrawl from
the hospitality market. A shame as we have enjoyed meeting the guests
(the vast majority who come from
overseas, principally North America, Europe and Australia) and
ensuring they have an exceptional experience. 
I am
sad that Moray Council’s lacklustre opposition to these schemes – evident in the tone and
content of its consultation responses to the Scottish Government – has failed to provide the robust
local defence that this landscape and community deserved. I recognise that the Council is itself
constrained by the financial and legal risks of pushing back against a heavily biased national policy
framework that favours almost uncontrolled expansion of onshore wind energy, but the long-term
cost to Moray in lost tourism
potential, eroded distinctiveness and missed regeneration
opportunities in places like the Cabrach will, I believe, prove to be even greater. 
The strategy recognises wider factors
that affect tourism, including policy
and land use. While these sit beyond
its direct control, it focuses on
improving collaboration, coordination
and local development. 
Page 108

Page 109

Appendix 2 
Moray Tourism
2036 Public Consultation Data 
4620490
2026-03-20
09:23:48
I think it is a fantastic idea, and much needed. A lot of
forethought has went into this, and a lot of key issues,
and challenges have been identified. 
As great as this strategy is, I
feel there is a lot of "vision"
within the document, but at
this early stage it is lacking a
lot of "mission" and what
actions are required. Very
good draft though.
As someone who has two different businesses in Moray linked to the tourism
sector, I am
very
pleased this is happening and the loss of VMS is not the end of Moray promoting itself. 
Engagement with local community councils and other groups will be useful I'm
sure to understand
the needs of each community, and for them
to build the infrastructure and maintain growth in what
seems to be a ever more important sector. 
I am
also glad to see this does not rely on visitor levies as a must. I think they are a terrible idea for
overall growth and unfair on the accomodation providers who (as collectors of the levy) will have
pay from
their own margin. The concept of visitors and business travellers having to pay a levy every
different layover location will be very off putting. 
I strongly hope the government, with the vision within the strategy, can fund a team
to deliver
tourism
growth in Moray without bleeding the two main groups of people required for it to function. 
The number 1 focus of domestic market is encouraging. I think VMS focussed on international
market too much. 
I like the wide variety of recognised key areas, and not only Whisky. With so much to offer in a small
space, Moray tourism
could thrive with more groups and communities coming together and "rowing
in the same direction", I hope this helps do that. 
The coast being strongly recognised as a key asset is welcome too. from
cliffs to the east, and
beaches to the west, it really should be more popular than it is. There are some wonderful coastal
paths existing which need some further help to link up and complete. Once this is done, there would
be another huge draw
to the area. 
Buckie Harbour, its expansion plans and capability of accepting cruise ships is another key
objective I would hope is included. The future volume of visitors could be massive if the investment
is made to replicate Invergordon and Aberdeen with this. Although unlikely to be capable of berthing
the largest cruise ships, there are plenty smaller ones that could manage. Relations with the cruise
operators will be crucial for this. 
Coach tour infrastructure is lacking in Moray too. It is essential for the area to invest in providing
areas and services for these ever more popular tours that are bypassing Moray every day. Coach
parks and designated drop off/ pick up points in towns and villages (where possible) could again
draw
large volumes of people into struggling town centres. 
We welcome the positive feedback. 
Comments on workforce,
infrastructure, community
engagement and visitor mix are noted
and reflect the need for a coordinated
and sustainable approach.
Opportunities such as cruise, coastal
access and coach provision will be
considered through delivery planning. 
4624484
2026-03-23
12:53:46
Lots of worthy aspirations, many
pillars/themes/priorities... not convinced it will be
delivered!  It reads to me more like a justification for
some publicly funded tourism
jobs which concerns me!
Not bad - but dubious that
there will be much tangible
progress.
I agree that Moray is under-recognised compared to its more glamorous neighbours but that is a
strong part of its charm
(along with better weather and no midges!!).  I believe that people who visit
Moray do so for its authenticity - they don't want over curated visitor trails/experiences/festivals etc. 
In trying to bring everything under one banner, there is a risk that the charm
and beauty of what we
have is lost.
The strategy acknowledges concerns
about delivery by setting out a phased
plan, early actions and a new
leadership structure.
It also emphasises that Moray’s
appeal lies in its authenticity and
positions development around
connecting and lightly packaging
existing assets rather than creating
overly curated experiences. 
4624759
2026-03-23
14:52:55
Although it is inspiring, it seems the delivery of this will
be managed by public sector rather than industry
I don't think it does this any
different to how
Visit Moray
Speyside positioned the
destination 
I think a DMO
is needed to ensure marketing success
The strategy sets out a partnership
approach, bringing together industry,
communities and public sector
partners. It aims to address the
current leadership gap and establish a
sustainable structure to support
marketing and coordination. 
Page 109

Page 110

Appendix 2 
Moray Tourism
2036 Public Consultation Data 
4632579
2026-03-25
14:10:17
It's great on paper.  
Very well
1. Establish Tourism
Leadership Group WITH
TEETH. It's not good going on about peaceful
landscapes and pristine beaches if you allow
huge, messy infrastructure projects like FLOW. 
2. Encourage entrepreneurialism
in tourism. So much hospitality here is outdated, takes no risks.
Bland food in hotels that haven't changed the menu or the carpets in 50 years. Compliant, but
boring. Very few
options here for the middle market. Think people visiting for funerals/weddings.
Young budget travellers have nowhere to stay. Done right, ethically, Airbnb type lets can fill that gap.
Communicate the rules around holiday lets, food and craft sales better. Explain how
you are helping
us to help tourism
in Moray. Convince us that we are not being used as another way to make m
oney
for the council. Engage us in in-person consultations.
The strategy supports innovation and
improvement across the tourism
sector, including strengthening the
quality and range of visitor
experiences. It also recognises the
need for clear communication,
business support and ongoing
engagement. 
Page 110

Page 111

Appendix 2 
Moray Tourism
2036 Public Consultation Data 
4650925
2026-04-01
15:05:13
A thoughtful and well-judged strategy that recognises
Moray’s strengths in heritage, landscape and premium
experiences. The emphasis on value over volume is
welcome. Delivery and early implementation will be key
to maintaining momentum.
The strategy reflects Moray
well, particularly its
heritage, whisky, coastline
and rural character. It
recognises opportunities in
curated, higher-value
tourism. Greater clarity on
infrastructure, transport and
business coordination
would strengthen it fu
The draft Moray Tourism
2036 Strategy is thoughtful and well aligned with Moray’s character and
strengths. The emphasis on value over volume, longer stays and curated experiences feels
appropriate for the area and reflects how
many visitors already engage with Moray. 
The recognition of Moray’s cultural depth is particularly welcome. The opportunity to connect
heritage, landscape, whisky, textiles, estates and local stories is one of Moray’s greatest strengths.
The experience cluster approach provides a useful framework for this. 
From
a delivery perspective, further clarity on implementation and execution would be helpful. In
particular: 
• Governance and leadership structure, including roles and responsibilities
• How
businesses, particularly micro and small operators, can engage with delivery
• How
collaboration will be facilitated in practice
• Funding and resourcing for delivery activity
• Timescales, milestones and measures of success 
In addition, consideration could be given to practical delivery mechanisms. For example: 
• A clear delivery plan with phased priorities
• Named leads for each strategic pillar or experience cluster
• Regular stakeholder forums or working groups
• Pilot projects or demonstration itineraries
• A shared platform
for collaboration and communication
• Monitoring and reporting on progress 
Early, visible actions would help build confidence and momentum. Identifying a small number of
achievable early initiatives or “quick wins” would help demonstrate progress and encourage wider
participation across the sector. 
There is also an opportunity to better support micro-businesses. Much of Moray’s visitor experience
is delivered by small operators, and ensuring these businesses are included and supported will be
important to successful delivery. This could include networking opportunities, product
development support, and clearer routes into collaborative initiatives. 
Transport and connectivity may also merit further consideration. Moray’s relative remoteness is
part of its appeal, but access between experiences can be challenging. Supporting joined-up
itineraries, encouraging longer stays, and improving coordination between providers may help
address this. 
The strategy’s emphasis on collaboration is welcome. Encouraging stronger links between
accommodation providers, attractions, guides, food producers and transport providers would
strengthen the visitor offer and help retain value within the local economy. 
Overall, this is a positive and encouraging strategy. With clear leadership, defined delivery
mechanisms and early momentum, it has the potential to strengthen Moray’s visitor economy while
preserving the qualities that make the area distinctive.
A phased delivery plan, defined
governance structures and ongoing
stakeholder engagement will support
implementation. Supporting micro
and small businesses is a core priority
within the Enterprise & Investment
pillar 
Page 111

Page 112

Appendix 2 
Moray Tourism
2036 Public Consultation Data 
4657512
2026-04-03
20:26:04
The strategy looks suitable to the region although there is
an impression that we are missing the medium
international spender who would be suitable for the
region. I look forward to seeing who will take the helmet
and effectively run the tourism
entity
I think there is a gap, a lack
of structure when
discussion the needs of
domestic and international
visitors and how
businesses
and the region can cater for
them. Not everyone comes
here for whisky, not
everyone is a premium
visitor 
The strategy recognises the need to
cater for a range of visitor segments,
including mid-range international
markets, alongside premium
and
domestic visitors. 
4658912
2026-04-06
12:37:59
It acknowledges what we in the region know
- Moray is a
compelling destination with scope to develop, and a
major gap in destination marketing activities. Could we
see more ambition- - or will that come?
Fair capture. Hoped for
more around year-round
tourism, and how
to
overcome the barriers - that
lack of recognition for Moray
Speyside as a region and
transport and connectivity
issues.
Pleased to see this draft being produced as a starting point to move forward following the end of
VMS. The action plan arising from
this will be all-important . Vital to work at pace on a SMART action
plan of implementation. It seems weighted towards being community connected rather than
ambitious - eg What about the potential of film/tv for tourism? We had Odyssey filmed along the
Moray coast last summer. Or tapping into a Moray spin off from
Scottish/UK cultural heat moments
eg Commonwealth Games 26; Tour de France 27; to drive visits. We need to shout about the region
not whisper in raising its profile.
As a whisky industry player, look forward to more on the priority segment on premium
international
and specialist interests, given the draw
that international food and drink brand and cashmere have,
and the role they play in putting Moray/Speyside on the map and the potential value these visitors
bring.
The strategy balances confidence with
authenticity, aiming to strengthen
visibility through coordinated
marketing, collaboration and a clearer
shared narrative. Opportunities such
as events and wider promotion will be
explored through delivery planning. 
Page 112

Page 113

Appendix 2 
Moray Tourism
2036 Public Consultation Data 
4660617
2026-04-07
20:56:37
Clear, ambitious and community-focused. Strong shift
from
volume to value and year-round tourism. Needs
faster delivery, clearer leadership ownership and early
visible wins to build confidence locally.
Reflects Moray well—
heritage, coast,
communities and quality
experiences. Opportunity to
better highlight aviation
heritage, STEM
and
interactive attractions as key
drivers of family visits and
year-round engagement.
From
a Morayvia perspective, the strategy is positive and aligns strongly with what we are already
delivering—
heritage, education, community engagement and year-round visitor appeal. However,
there are several opportunities to strengthen it and ensure real delivery: 
1. Recognise Aviation Heritage as a Core Asset
Moray has a unique aviation story (RAF Kinloss, RAF Lossiemouth, Nimrod, SAR helicopters, fast
jets) which is not fully capitalised on. This is a nationally significant asset and should sit alongside
whisky, coast and nature as a key theme. 
2. Strengthen Family & STEM
Tourism
There is a major opportunity to position Moray as a family learning destination. Interactive centres
like Morayvia bring dwell time, repeat visits and off-season resilience. STEM-based tourism
should
be explicitly referenced. 
3. Year-Round Tourism
Needs Indoor Anchors
The strategy talks about extending the season—
this requires investment in indoor attractions.
Supporting projects that bring key assets undercover (such as aircraft collections) will directly
enable this. 
4. Better Use of Existing Assets Before Creating New
Ones
Moray already has strong, volunteer-led attractions. Support should prioritise improving,
connecting and promoting what exists rather than duplicating provision. 
5. Connectivity & Packaging
Link attractions into themed trails (e.g. Aviation & Defence Trail, Coastal Rescue Story, Engineering
& Innovation). Encourage joint ticketing, shared marketing and itineraries to increase length of stay. 
6. Digital Presence & Single Destination Platform
A central, up-to-date digital platform
is critical. Many attractions struggle with visibility—
this needs
to be fixed early. 
7. Volunteer-Led Sector Support
Much of Moray’s offer relies on volunteers. The strategy should recognise and support this with
training, funding access and capacity building. 
8. Infrastructure Matters
Practical issues—
parking, signage, access, weather resilience—
have a big impact on visitor
experience. Small capital investments can deliver big gains. 
9. Clear Delivery & Accountability
The biggest risk is lack of delivery. There needs to be clear ownership, timelines and funded roles to
coordinate activity. 
10. Early Wins
Identify and support a few
visible projects in the first 12–24 months to build momentum
and
confidence. 
Overall, the strategy is a strong foundation. With clearer recognition of aviation heritage, stronger
support for existing attractions, and a focus on delivery, Moray can significantly increase both visitor
value and community benefit.
The strategy aligns with Moray’s
strengths and emphasises value, year-
round tourism
and community benefit,
but highlights the need for clear
delivery, defined leadership and early
visible actions to build confidence. It
also supports better use of existing
assets, improved coordination and
stronger digital presence, while
broader themes such as aviation
heritage, indoor attractions, volunteer
support and infrastructure investment
sit within the identified need to
strengthen experiences, extend the
season and connect the offer more
effectively. 
Page 113

Page 114

Appendix 2 
Moray Tourism
2036 Public Consultation Data 
4666680
2026-04-13
09:01:23
Very good.  If places are cared for people will take home
good memories.
I think it's good because
each place has it's own
character built on the
particular historical aspect
of the area or industry
associated with it.
Signage!! It needs to be a whole lot better.  The amount of times you follow
a Tourist sign and they
run out a mile down the road.  That can be very frustrating to a visitor trying to find a place of
interest.
Improving signage and wayfinding is
identified as an early priority within the
Visitor Experience pillar. 
4666782
2026-04-13
10:08:14
Very comprehensive.  Easy to read and see what the
drivers and outcomes will be.
I think it reflects it well. 
We welcome the positive feedback.
4667067
2026-04-13
11:52:11
Agree the loss of the Destination Marketing Organisation
has created a significant gap in leadership, coordination
& collaboration. Destination marketing activity has
ceased, digital platforms are no longer managed and no
engagement with the travel trade.
Moray is not Scotland’s
loudest destination and that
is part of its charm, and its
strength. It is a place to slow
down, delve deeper and
return often. A place where
people, nature and culture
flourish together and where
visiting feels welcome.
Without a DMO
there is no direction or focus on Moray Tourism. Local events help to build
collaboration with local businesses and a place to share good practice. Also with out
representatives for the Moray area attending Travel trade events all over the world we are missing
out in showcasing what our area has to offer.
The strategy acknowledges that the
loss of the DMO
has created a
significant gap in leadership,
coordination, marketing and travel
trade engagement, and proposes
rebuilding this through a new
leadership structure. 
It also reinforces Moray’s positioning
as a quiet, authentic destination
encouraging slower, repeat visits,
while recognising that stronger
coordination, event collaboration and
representation at travel trade level are
needed to improve visibility and
promotion. 
4667527
2026-04-13
15:25:54
Very heavy on blue sky thinking and not  srategically
achievable. Lot of buzz words without substance or
completion markers on propopsed projects 
Moray has everything it
needs in terms of visitor
interests. But "whispering
what we have as an
alternative destination has
been spoken about for years
and hasn't worked. We need
to shout from
the
rooftops.about Moray
instead of hoping we are just
'found'
Infrastructure and investment ard a priority instead of everything through time and on a shoestring.
We need huge investment  in buildings and landscapes..cleaned..towns and villages kept clean with
investment in equipment and a workforce to match( not rely just on volunteers) who do a fab job but
it should not just be them
who make places look good. We have iconic brands in Moray:
Walkers shortbread
Baxters
Gordon and Macphail
52 Distilleries incl The Macallan
Why does the local.authority not partner with them
long term
to develop Moray as a destination that
wows. If the iconic brands are here. Invite them
to spend a bit of profits on community payback to
towns and villages across Moray. The area needs to be freshened up it looking very tired and
unloved. Lived here all my life and although volunteer groups have tried to improve things it needs
continuous work to keep.it cleans well maintained with an abundance of floral impact. Investment
investment investment..pity the council have sold.all.its assets to shore up it's deficit and bad
management instead of investing in it
The strategy recognises concerns
around delivery by noting gaps in
coordination, infrastructure and
investment, and proposes a phased
approach with new
leadership
structures to address this. 
The strategy prioritises infrastructure
investment, collaboration and
partnership working, including
opportunities to better connect with
key regional and global brands. 
4668254
2026-04-14
09:09:57 
It would be so lovely if we could turn Elgin city centre into a historic version of signage and shop
fronts. We have such beautiful architecture and it is let down by bright, cheap looking
advertisements in shop windows and signage. We have so much history in Elgin let’s celebrate it by
honouring its visual beauty. Make it a rule that shop fronts and owners of buildings have to keep
them
clean, painted and maintained to a high standard. Make us proud to live in Elgin. All the other
towns seem
to be managing this perfectly well, adding such charm
and elegance to their town
centres. 
Perhaps the Moray Council need to drop their business rates as discussed many times before by
hundreds of locals so that they can afford to keep things clean up to standard. Also this will allow
for other boutique type shops to open and build strong businesses. 
Get rid of Starbucks who do not pay taxes and allow
the independent cafes to flourish. Allow
a more
European feel to settle into the centre with tables and chairs in the plainstones. 
This will give a feeling of pride and hopefully have an impact on the youth who can feel proud of
where they come from. So we as adults can feel proud. Instead we are embarrassed to bring family
and friends to the city centre as it just feels run down and drieg!! 
Place quality and town centre
experience are recognised as
important elements, aligning with
wider regeneration initiatives and
community-led improvement. 
The comment on non-domestic rates
is noted as part of the wider factors
affecting businesses and investment.    
Page 114

Page 115

Appendix 2 
Moray Tourism
2036 Public Consultation Data 
4668515
2026-04-14
11:05:22
Many pages taken to say very little
Partially
The strategy pays little attention to climate change. Moray is improving in its CO2 emissions area
wide per capita compared to the rest of Scotland, however Moray's position in CO2 emissions from
Transport per 1000 population has worsened, now
in the lowest quartile. Expansion of EV charging
infrastructure is encouraging and will go partway toward improving Moray's position however other
contributors towards Moray's greenhouse gas output, like the unelectrified railway through Moray,
which tourists will make use of (diesel trains), should feature in the "What is holding Moray back"
section.
The strategy includes climate, nature
and stewardship within the
Environment & Infrastructure pillar,
with further development to be
supported through delivery planning.  
4669671
2026-04-15
09:05:14
The Strategy in theory is very good.
I think the Strategy identifies
opportunities quite well and,
at this macro level, needs.
But it will left to be seen, at
an implementation level, as
to whether these things can
be delivered
A big concern is that smaller places within Moray get overlooked and aren't given the assistance
that they need to make the best of their opportunities. 
The strategy prioritises inclusive,
place-based development and aims to
ensure that all communities can
participate and benefit through
improved coordination and support.  
4671543
2026-04-16
08:34:36
struggled to read it even with zooming in
struggled to read it even with
zooming in
I stay  east of Moray in Portknockie. The amount of visitors I see every day is massive.A lot come
here to visit the Bow
Fiddle But no money seems to be invested back into Portknockie. There was a
small car park built, but   
it it not big enough to accomodate all the people visiting at times.
Campervans struggle to find parking outwith the carpark as they cannot go in there. The area where
the car park is beside the bow
fiddle could be tidied up and improvements made to make it look
more attractive for the visitors, maybe clear information boards and the bins should be emotied
more, always overflowing. We also have a historic harbour with the paddling pool which is also very
busy in the summer, but snarled up with cars. The harbour is popular with boarders as well. This is
currently maintained by volunteers, but really this area too could be doing with making made to look
more attractive for visitors ( the volunteers do a fatastic job, but have to raise funds to maintain this
area. The lack of signage is another issue here. I see visitors confused where to go 
after visiting the
Bow
Fiddle. We have also caves, jennys well( also maintained by volunteers) . Portknockie along
with other villages in the area have a strong fishing heritage which can be seen by the lovley
cottages  around the harbour area. It would be nice to some money invested in this area as we
attract so much tourism. Any such investments seem
to go to Elgin, but time to invest in our lovley
coastal villages
The strategy recognises pressure on
busy locations such as coastal
villages and highlights gaps in
infrastructure, signage and
maintenance. It supports improving
these areas and ensuring investment
better reflects visitor demand.  
4671709
2026-04-16
10:06:25
Lot of waffle with no clear plan in place
It touches on our identity but
doesnt elaborate on all of it. 
People dont just come here
for whisky, its the coast line
the sea and the way of life,
nothing like city living. 
Yes the plan identifies the areas where we need work but it doesnt say how
to improve them. 
Communication is key, what ways will you use to improve that? 
What are the 13 places, who will you approach to talk about these places to assess each place
properly? 
You want to know
what the people think but the document is full of elaborate language which most
people dont understand fully.  Simplify for the masses instead of the select few.
The supporting Guidance for Delivery
document, which will be published
once the strategy is approved,
provides greater clarity on actions and
implementation. Communication and
engagement are core elements of the
proposed governance model.
4677064
2026-04-21
07:25:26
It’s good if somewhat repetitive and dry.
It’s missing the opportunity
to touch move and inspire
people with a vision of how
Moray could be
experienced. There are
many artists and craft
people and places which
alongside whisky golf and
beaches could be exploited
to better effect.  
What will people come away with? How
might their experiences of Moray make a difference in their
lives? 
The strategy sets out Moray’s assets
and themes clearly, with a primary
focus on strengthening coordination,
leadership and delivery. It recognises
the importance of arts, crafts,
heritage, landscape and lifestyle
alongside established strengths such
as whisky, coast and golf. A more
engaging, experience-led narrative will
be further developed through
branding, storytelling and promotional
activity as delivery progresses.
4678317
2026-04-22
09:17:54
pleased to see it
traditional view, breaking no
new
ground
Special interest tourism
is important
The strategy builds on Moray’s
strengths and recognises the
importance of special interest tourism
as part of the overall offer.
Page 115

Page 116

Appendix 2 
Moray Tourism
2036 Public Consultation Data 
4682762
2026-04-26
21:47:25 
Buckie & District Community Council (BDCC) welcomes
the strategy. This first document contains a lot of
generalities, which is unavoidable at this stage.
However, if this is able to be brought to fruition it will
produce benefits for Moray communities
Well identified.
The ‘SCOTO
Press Pause Destination Competence Appraisal’ is valuable in identifying the strengths
and weaknesses of Moray. It would have been useful if the 13 places had been named. Buckie &
District Community Council (BDCC) recognises that based on the 20 criteria we have a lot of
improvements to make. As a newly reformed community council, we are eager to fulfil our role in
promoting and maximising the assets of Buckie and surrounding areas. We have the only working
harbour in Moray, which makes us a key gateway for water-based tourism, i.e. cruise ships. Other
assets include, but isn’t limited to, the Fishing Heritage Centre, Fishwives walk, 2 quality golf
courses, coastal and hill walks, historic battle sites, beaches, seawater sports, fishing excursions,
and a permanent seal colony at Portgordon. 
To achieve the goals of the strategy, improved communication and co-ordination will be required,
as well as greater inclusivity. The BDCC
has felt left out of decision-making roles, and initiatives,
that affect our community over the last few
years and we want to see this changed. This has
principally stemmed, we feel, from
poor communications, as well as being a community council
that has struggled to maintain a consistent membership. We recognise that several community
groups in Buckie by-pass the BDCC
and liaise directly with MC, and vice versa. As a statutory body,
we should be ‘c.c-ed’ in on communications. It is this type of poor communication and co-
ordination which needs to be remedied, moving forward, if we are to achieve good outcomes for
Buckie as part of this tourism
strategy.
Improved communication,
coordination and inclusivity are
central to the proposed governance
model, ensuring communities are
actively involved in decision-making
and delivery.  
4683736
2026-04-27
16:36:44 
It’s encouraging to see that the vast amount of
consultation work carried out by SCOTO
has created a
strategy that is fair in regard to all tourism
businesses,
not weighted towards larger businesses. If changes are
made, this equality must be maintained. 
This strategy is unique to
Moray and can only be
achieved in Moray.
Community Wealth Building
is vital for Moray's small
businesses and
communities, and the
strategy balances the
involvement of individuals,
volunteers, and small and
large businesses. 
I appreciate and support incorporating the following principles: Valuing improvements to the visitor
experience over increasing visitor numbers; incorporating the idea of “Stewardship” to allow
any
individual to step up, play their part, then pass the baton to others; and creating a tourism
landscape built on fairness, where everyone in Moray has the opportunity to play their part, if they
choose to do so. 
I feel that the “fairness” within this draft strategy must be maintained, as should the strategy’s
focus on the overall Moray experience, without any weighting towards any particular sector. 
Discussions around funding are important, especially looking at the recent past where the
contributions of larger tourism-related businesses were seen as disproportionate to those made by
smaller businesses (TBID Levy). The strategy should not imply a pre-determined decision on a
Visitor Levy in Moray, although mention of a Visitor Levy as a source of funding should be
acknowledged. Other sources of funding have been tried and failed in Moray (Central / Local
Government funding, Business Levy). 
I think volunteers, charities and social enterprises will be important to the delivery of the strategy in
Moray, and a model that supports and encourages this would be worthwhile. Businesses will also
have an important role to play, inputting into the appropriate governance structure. 
I support the narrative, mission and values as proposed. Finding the right people to lead and move
this forward is important, as is the idea of stewardship. Involvement from
all is important:
individuals with an interest in tourism; third sector and voluntary organisations; small businesses,
and big businesses - but involvement must be time-specific and restricted, with the ability to involve
new
people with new
ideas over time and not have the same people involved for an eternity.
Lessons could be learned from
the current Elgin Neighbourhood Board / Pride in Place Board. 
Moray's regional identity is an issue, being pulled at times East and West. I agree that the voice of
people and business should come together as one. Administrative boundaries are not important to
the visitor, and this should be considered.
The strategy aligns with these
principles by prioritising value over
volume, stewardship, fairness and
community benefit, and avoiding
reliance on any single sector. A
blended funding model is proposed,
with no reliance on any single
mechanism.  
Page 116

Page 117

Appendix 2 
Moray Tourism
2036 Public Consultation Data 
4683956
2026-04-27
19:36:33 
I'm
very pleased to see it so rooted in people and place,
with recognition of Moray's enormous potential and deep
heritage. 
I'm
glad it recognises that
Moray has the capacity to be
a top class tourist
destination but its been
overlooked or
misunderstood or options
for growth and success
under-explored in the past.  
There are parts of Moray that are overlooked but are very special. For instance, I hope that places
like Keith can get the support it needs to really rise to this opportunity - funding is always an issue
and ideas like making it A Scots Toun or linking it more into its rich history and as part of a whisky
trail seem
to be a good option. There are lots of people in Keith with some great ideas and ready to
be part of an exciting new
strategy, as much as other places in the region that perhaps have been
more successful in drawing in visitors than others. I'd like to see a concerted effort to boost these
places. I'm
pleased to see such a focus on collaboration, capacity, capability and coordination as
its through this that places like Keith can really come to life to the benefit of visitors, local
businesses and the people who live there. And its got great cafes! 
The strategy promotes place-based
development and collaboration to
ensure all communities can realise
their potential and contribute to the
visitor economy. 
Page 117

Page 118

Page 118

Page 119

Report to: Economic Development
and Infrastructure
Services Committee 
Meeting 
Date:
16 June 2026  
Report by: Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations  
Author: Nicola Moss and
Beverly Smith
Contact
Email:
nicola.moss@moray.gov.uk 
beverly.smith@moray.gov.uk 
Subject: Operations and Environment and Growth, Planning and Climate 
Capital and Revenue Budget Monitoring to 31 March 2026 
1.  PURPOSE 
☒ For Decision      ☐  For Information 
1.1  The purpose of this report is to scrutinise and note the quarter four position of 2025/26
regarding Operations and Environment and Growth, Planning and Climate Revenue and
Capital budgets.  
1.2  This report is submitted to Committee in terms of Section III (A) (2) of the Council’s
Scheme of Administration relating to the consideration of Revenue and Capital budgets
and long term financial plans.  
2.  SUMMARY  
2.1  This report provides an update on the quarter four budgetary position 2025/2026 and
comments on variances for the Revenue and Capital budgets for the period to 31 March
2026 regarding Operations and Environment and Growth, Planning and Climate, Revenue
and Capital budgets. 
3.  RECOMMENDATIONS 
3.1  It is recommended that Committee scrutinise and note the quarter four budget position
for 2025/2026. 
Nicola Moss, Head of Operations and Environment
Beverly Smith, Head of Growth, Planning and Climate (Chief Planning Officer)   
Item 10.
Page 119

Page 120

4.  BACKGROUND AND CONTEXT  
4.1  The Performance Management Framework 2020 (page 27) requires that progress against
Capital and Revenue expenditure and the Capital Plan is reported to the relevant Service
Committee.  Heads of Service have been tasked with reducing overspends and generally
reducing expenditure back in line with budget. 
4.2  Savings and increased charges to the Revenue budget were approved when the budget was
set by Moray Council on 26 February 2025 (paragraph 3 of the minute refers).  Updates have
been presented to the Council quarterly as part of the full budget monitoring.  
5.  QUARTER 4  REVENUE BUDGET PERFORMANCE  
5.1  Operations and Environment 
Quarter 4 (Q4) results are often impacted by timing issues, the detail of Q4 is set out in the
table below. 
5.2  The table below shows Operations and Environment Revenue Budget position for Q4
2025 / 2026.  
Service Area Annual Budget Q4 Actual  Variance 
£000s £000s £000s
Building
Cleaning&
Catering
8,119 7,964 155
Open Spaces 1,839 1,848 -9
Waste
Management
8,627 8,457 170
Roads
Management
5,357 6,004 -647
Fleet Services -1,644 -1,492 -152
Design
Consultancy
1,250 1,281 -31
Traffic &
Transportation
Mgt
6,653 6,273 380
Marine Services -110 -3 -107
Operations and
Environment -
Directorate
212 213 -1
Operations and
Environment -
Efficiency
savings
367 0 367
Operations and
Environment 
Admin / Support
/H&S
516 520 -4
Total 31,186 31,068 118    
Page 120

Page 121

5.3  Environmental Services 
The table below shows Environmental Services Revenue Budget information for Q4
2025/2026. 
Service
Area
Annual
Budget
Q4 Actual  Variance 
£000s £000s £000s
Waste
Management
8,627 8,457 170
Open Spaces 1,839 1,848                         (9)
Building
Cleaning and
Catering
8,119 7,964 155
Total 18,598 18,273 323
underspend 
5.4  Waste is underspent at year end by £170K.  Trade Waste income (£133K overspend) and
Green Waste income (£29K overspend) did not meet the target. However, recycling net
income is higher due to a favourable recycling market (£210K underspend) and the income
from bulky waste collections  is better than budget (£22K underspend). Fuel costs are also
less than budgeted (£199K underspend) with a contributing factor to this being the cessation
of using the BOMAG compactor at Dallachy Landfill.  
5.5  Open Spaces achieved an overspend of £8K at year end. Income from burials was below
target (97K overspend).  Overspends were offset by underspends in other areas such as
staffing (£185K) and material (£20K) costs.. The impact of dealing with Storm Floris and
Storm Amy impacted on the budgetary position with additional unbudgeted works needing to
be carried out to address storm damage and health and safety issues relates to trees. 
5.6  Building Catering and Cleaning achieved an underspent of £155K at year end.  An
underspend on food costs (£23K), an underspend in materials (£13K) and an over achieved in
income (£81K) , mainly resulting from favourable sales from secondary school meals, all
contributed to the year end position. 
5.7  Savings position at Q4 2025/2026 
Red Saving not taken and won’t be achieved this year- if slipped into
future years details given
Amber  Saving not taken and uncertain if it will be achieved in full this year
Green Saving taken, or will be taken, in full
Note: Where items show as amber and green, these have been split across two years, 
with the amber element carrying into 2026/27 savings. 
Description Red
Savings
Amber
Savings 
Green
Savings
Total Reason for balance
Page 121

Page 122

Approved when
2025/2026 budget
set
£000s  £000s  £000s  £000s 
Waste
Management-
Dallachy
630 0 0 630 Savings not achieved
and won’t be carried
forward
Waste Management
– Reduce HWRC
(Household Waste
Recycling Centre)
opening hours 
(close 1 weekday)
28 0 22 50 Original template
suggested a number
of sites would close
but this proposal was
reduced. Full saving
will not be met. £28K
saving will not be
carried forward
Waste
Management-
Close Dallachy
HWRC
0 0 10 10 
Waste
Management-
Dallachy Closure
30 0 0 30  Saving not achieved
and won’t be carried
forward
Open Spaces – full
cost recovery from
HRA (housing
revenue account) of
inspection of play
areas
10 0 18 28 £10k being retained
and won’t be carried
forward as a saving.   
5.8  Roads Maintenance and Fleet Services
The table below shows Roads and Fleet Revenue Budget information for Q4 2025/2026. 
Service
Area
Annual Budget Q4 Actual  Variance 
£000s £000s £000s
Roads
Management
5,357 6,004 -647
(overspend)
Fleet Services  1,644 1,492 152
(underspend)
Total 7,001 7,496 -495 
5.9  Roads Maintenance is made up of the budgets for general road maintenance works such as
pothole repairs, cyclic gully cleaning, footway repairs, grass cutting and ditching repairs. In
addition, this budget includes street lighting repairs, electricity costs and the provision of the
Councils winter maintenance service. 
5.10  There are variances across the different budget lines. Staffing underspends are due to
vacancies, which necessitates the use of external contractors at a higher cost to ensure
essential and core levels of service are maintained. Excluding winter maintenance, roads
management reported an underspend of £480k.
Page 122

Page 123

5.11  Winter Maintenance overspent by £1,123m. This is due to the impact of a few weather events
of prolonged periods of snow and also the increase of salt prices which is affecting budgets. 
Salt usage was increased by 1363 tonnes and there was also a significant increase of 176
more Priority 1 treatments from the previous year. Expenditure is driven by the weather
conditions and implementation of the approved winter plan (which is a requirement on the
council). 
5.12  Fleet reported to be £152,000 over budget.  In a similar situation to Roads, there are long
term staffing underspends in Fleet due to vacancies.  However, following recent success in
staff recruitment, has resulted in more work being undertaken in house and has seen a
reduction in repair works that have previously been outsourced at higher prices. However,
this has not completely balanced off through to reducing overspends on sub-contractors. 
There are overspends in spare parts, hire of additional vehicles for departments and
accident damage are reflected against Fleet expenditure budgets, however Fleet recharge
income to departments for ad hoc maintenance work done in the workshop and hire of
additional vehicles exceed budget. 
Savings position at Q4   2025/2026 
Red Saving not taken and won’t be achieved this year- if slipped into
future years details given
Amber  Saving not taken and uncertain if it will be achieved in full this year
Green Saving taken, or will be taken, in full
Note: Where items show as amber and green, these have been split across two years, 
with the amber element carrying into 2026/27 savings. 
Description Red
Savings
Amber 
Savings 
Green
Savings
Total Reason for balance
Approved when
2025/2026 budget
set
£000s  £000s  £000s  £000s 
Roads Management
– Roads
Maintenance hire
out of machinery
0 50 0 50 New machine was late
arriving due to supply
chain issues. Initial
Interest from other
LA’s has not
materialised to date.
Fleet – Lease
Specialist Vehicles 
0 76 0 76 It is unlikely that this
will achieve savings
this financial year but
a full review is in
progress.
Roads Management
– Gully Cleaning
0 20 30       50 £30k of the saving will
be achieved 25/26.
The remaining £20k
will be taken 26/27.
Roads Management
– Street Lighting
8 0 42 50 Small variance,
however £42k saving
achieved to date.
Page 123

Page 124

Fleet – Restructure
DAR 
0 0 24 24 N/A    
5.13  Design Consultancy
The table below shows Design Consultancy Revenue Budget information for Q4 2025/2026. 
Service
Area
Annual Budget Q4 Actual  Variance 
£000s £000s £000s
Design
Consultancy
1,250  1,281  -31     
5.14  The Design Consultancy revenue budget was overspent by £31,000, which equates to 2% of
the budget.  The reason for this overspend is staff shortages meant that the target for capital
recharge and recoverable works was not achieved.   
5.15  Marine Services
The table below shows Marine Services Revenue Budget information for Q4 2025/2026. 
Service
Area
Annual Budget Q4 Actual  Variance 
£000s £000s £000s
Marine
Services
-110 -2.7 -108 
Marine Services ended the year in surplus, but with a net shortfall against budget of £108k.
Whilst income was on budget, in recent years income has exceeded expectation. The
principle reason behind this (unbudgeted) variance is the downturn in whisky production with
the resultant reduction in cargo for the maltings. Other income sources are being explored,
including timber exports which are underway. Expenditure was better than budget for the
dredger and there was also external dredging income in Q4. Expenditure in the harbours was
higher than budget mainly relating to essential electrical works, energy costs, and essential
works to the cargo sheds.  
5.16  Transportation
The table below shows the Transportation  Revenue Budget information for 
Q4 2025/2026. 
Service
Area
Annual Budget Q4 Actual  Variance 
£000s £000s £000s
Traffic &
Transportation
Mgt.
6,653 6,273 380 
Transportation saw an underspend at year end in the revenue position. This was mainly as a
result of better than budget income relating to streetworks, with particularly high levels of
utility works during the year. This will be monitored to identify any potential long term trends
that could be incorporated into budget. m.connect services operated better than budget, and
the public transport unit as a whole delivered within budget. There was a shortfall of income
Page 124

Page 125

in car parks of £225k. Whilst acknowledging this shortfall, the car park income has been
lower than budget as a long standing position since Covid and various workstreams are
targeted to increasing income including the ability to purchase season tickets via the parking
app. It is pleasing to note that the actual income for 25/26 was £22k better than 24/25
showing a positive trend. 
5.17  Growth, Planning and Climate
The table below shows Growth, Planning   and Climate Revenue Budget information for Q4
2025/2026. 
Service
Area
Annual Budget Q4 Actual  Variance 
£000s £000s £000s
Economy and
Enterprise
1,039 699 340
Strategic
Planning and
Development
122 -162 284
Moray Growth
Deal
151 121 30
Total 1,312 658 654 
5.18  Economy and Enterprise variance includes £170k Coastal Communities Grant Funding to be
carried forward and £70k Fairer Futures Fund.  Also one-off £93k receipt from Grampian
Venture Capital Fund.  
5.19  Strategic Planning and Development variance includes £272k Pride in Place Capacity
Funding to be carried forward.  
5.20 Moray Growth Deal variance includes professional fees underspend, with Scottish
Government funding utilised for a consultancy award during Q4.     
CAPITAL BUDGETS 
5.21 Environmental Services   
Project Capital 
Budget
2025/26
Actual 
Expenditure
Q4
Forecast
Q4 
Actual
Q4
Variance 
£000s £000s £000s £000s £000s
Waste Mgt     
Dallachy
Landfill site
final capping
1,368  1,064 303 39 264
Upgrade
Recycling
Centres
(building)
40 67 68 55 13
Page 125

Page 126

Upgrade
Recycling
Centres 
(equipment)
25 25 0 0 0
Domestic
and Trade
Waste Bins
63 27 80 44 36
NESS Energy
from Waste 
150 16 121 0 121
Total 1,646 1,199 572 138 434      
Open
Spaces     
Cemetery
Provision in
Elgin
3,339 2,612 1,501 774 727
Cemetery
Provision in
Moray
30 30 24 24 0
Parks and
Open
Spaces
Infrastructur
e 
25 24 11 10 1
Children’s
Play Areas 
(Scottish
Government
funded)
659 386 222 141 81
Total 4,053 3,052 1,758 949 809      
Facilities     
Facilities
Management
Equipment
9 7 3 1 2
TOTAL 5,708 4,258 2,333 1,088 1,245 
5.22 Whilst the final capping works at Dallachy landfill have been completed, there are still some
compensation events with the contractor that are still to be concluded.   These will be
finalised in 2026/27 and the  works will be completed within the budget allocation. 
5.23 The upgrade to recycling centre budget has been overspent but has been supported by
underspends in other areas.  The alternative access to Mycroft has now been completed and
the footpath is open.  Degraded storage bays have also been replaced at Chanonry
Household Waste and Recycling Centre. 
5.24 The full budget provision has been spent on procuring new skips for the Household Waste
and Recycling Centres. 
Page 126

Page 127

5.25 With regards the purchased of domestic and trade waste bins a reimbursement was received
from the bin supplier regarding bins procured in 2024/25.  These additional funds increased
the budget available for procuring bins.    
5.26 The construction work for Elgin Cemetery has been completed. There will now be a period of
time to allow the ground to settle, and vegetation to establish, before the cemetery is used.
The expected timescale for use in circa quarter 4 of 2026/27. The underspend in quarter 4 of
2025/26 is primarily due to the value engineering exercises which have taken place as part of
the construction. The underspend will be reallocated back to some of the projects which
were defunded in support of the Elgin cemetery project.    
5.27 As previously reported to this Committee on 29 April 2025, due to the incorrect application of
capping at the beginning of the financial year, there was no budget allocation for the
cemetery provision in Moray or parks and open spaces infrastructure. This was addressed by
Finance in quarter 3 (December 2025), and there was a reinstatement of the budget for Q4. 
Given the time restrictions, only limited works were able to be carried out in quarter 4.  
5.28 The upgrade of the play areas was delivered in line with the plan, including new play areas at
Hopeman and Randolph Lane.  Whilst orders have been committed in 2025/26, installation
timelines will mean that completion of the main play areas scheduled for an upgrade in
2025/26, such as Alice Littler Park, will be completed in 2026/27.  
5.29 The budget for Facilities is used to replace equipment needed for service delivery, such as
replacement hoovers, scrubbers. 
5.30 Roads Maintenance and Fleet Services Capital    
Project Capital
Budget
2025/
2026
Actual 
Expenditure
Q4
Forecast
Q4
Actual
Q4 Variance 
£000s £000s £000s £000s £000s
Roads
Improvements     
Carriageway
resurfacing/
reconstruction
/ surface
dressing
2,490  2490 280 108 0
Drainage and
other works
270 267 193 101 3
underspend
Footways  50 73 21 14 23
overspend
Street Lighting     
Street Lighting  522 542 181 69 20
overspend
Sub total     
Fleet     
Page 127

Page 128

Vehicle
Replacement
Programme
2,362 2,011 844 637 £351K
underspend
MOT Spend to
Save 
49 49 - - 0
TOTAL 5,718     
5.31 The capital budgets ensure investment within the road, footpath, drainage and street lighting
assets are used to preserve the long term make up of these asset types and involve adopting
an asset management approach. 
5.32 Within the roads resurfacing  capital budget allocation, a full expenditure has been achieved. 
5.33 The named capital schemes funded from 25/26 capital allocation have been completed as
planned. This included completion of C1H landslip, A939 landslip Creag Chalcaidh quarry
and works at Main street, Buckie. 
5.34 The street lighting column replacement programme which prioritises replacing oldest
columns first slightly overspent due to an increase in core material costs. 
5.35 Spend to Quarter 4 totalled £2,060,000 against a forecast spend to date of £2,411,000,
resulting in an underspend of £351,000. Fleet Services operates a ten year vehicle and plant
replacement programme to ensure assets are replaced at the optimum point, taking account
of residual value, maintenance costs and downtime. 
5.36 The underspend was attributed to a number of vehicles that had been ordered but not
delivered due to factory and build issues. Without these delays the full allocation of budget
would have been spent.  
5.37 Design Consultancy Capital (including Harbours Infrastructure) 
Project Capital 
Budget
2025/26
Actual
Expenditure
Q4 
Forecast
Q4 
Actual
Q4 
Variance 
£000s £000s £000s £000s £000s
Bridges     
A941/340 New
Bishopmill
Bridge
420 391 189 189 0
B9015/30
Sourden
0 0 0 0 0
U57H/11 South
Arndilly
0 0 0 0 0
Removal of
Footbridges
0 0 0 0 0
Blackhills
Culvert
335 365 0 0 0
Sanquhar Loch
Footbridge
0 0 0 0 0
Page 128

Page 129

Road
Improvements     
B9016 Landslip
Repair
65 4 61 3 58
C1H Landslip 345 168 0 0 0
Glenlivet 70 0 0 0 0
15 Main St
Buckie retaining
wall
30 17 0 0 0
Buckie North
Street Wall
150 105 45 40 5
Landslip
Feasibility
Studies
23 0 0 0 0
A939 Landslip
Creag
Chalcaidh
Quarry
175  137 0 0 0      
Flood Risk and
Coastal Mgt     
Coastal
Adaption Plan
20 0 20 16 4
Coastal
Adaption Plan –
Real Time
Monitoring
102 71 21 21 0
Anti Tank
Assessment
36 8 36 8 28
Project Capital
Budget 
2025/26
Actual
Expenditure
Q4
Forecast
Q4 
Actual
Q4
Variance 
£000s £000s £000s £000s £000s
Lossiemouth
Christmas
Trees- Phase 2
19 11 14 6 8
Development of
Simple
Assessment
Guide
23 20 9 9 0
Cullen Seawall
assessment
75 31 75 31 44
Millbuies
drawdown
75 23 75 23 52
Findhorn
Coastal Erosion
10 10 0 0 0      
Harbours     
Page 129

Page 130

Navigation Light
Buckie Harbour
125 109 0 0 0
Buckie
Weighbridge
22 21 21 0 1
Pier 1 joints 124 105 98 88 10
Harbour Capital
life expired
357 318 0 0 0
Pontoons  33 18 27 12 15
Portknockie
Middle Pier
Design
35 30 0 0 0
Cullen Viaduct
repairs
2 2 0 0 0
Cullen West
Pier
49 14 49 14 35 
TOTAL    2,720     
5.38  The work to repair the landslip on the B9016 has been delayed due to reduced staff
resources.  The contract for this work has been awarded and it will now be completed in
2026/27. Investigation works at Buckie North Street are ongoing and are anticipated to be
completed early in 2026/27. Work to the assessment of anti tank defences on coastal
erosion has been delayed due to the complexity of the investigation.  The contract for this
work has been awarded and work is expected to be completed early in 2026/27.  Design work
for the provision of a drawdown facility at Millbuies Reservoir is near completion and an
allowance for construction works is in the capital plan for 2026/27.  Work to repair the Pier 1
joints at Buckie Harbour have been delayed due to bad weather and operational
requirements and these will be completed in early 2026/27.  Works to Cullen West Pier are
ongoing and will be completed in 2026/27. 
5.39 Transportation Capital - The table below shows Transportation Capital Budget information
for 2025 /2026. 
Project Capital
Budget
2025/
2026
Actual
Expenditure
Q4
Forecast
Q4 
Actual
Q4
Variance 
£000s £000s £000s £000s £000s
Car Parks     
Car Park
Capital 
Improvements
26 26 7 10 -3
Traffic     
Road Safety
Provision
70 35 57 22 35
Disability
Adaptions
50 50 2 12 -10
Page 130

Page 131

New Road
Signs and
Markings
37 37 24 16 8
Traffic data
Collection
Equipment
27 27 57 0 57
Traffic Signal
Replacement
52 15 0 0 0
Active Travel     
Active Travel 500 407 0 296 -296      
TOTAL 762 598 147 356 -209 
5.40 At Quarter 4 activities within Traffic were reprofiled as required to ensure budgets were
balanced and works programmes adjusted. This includes carry forward of £35k Road Safety
budget to support remedial works at Lossiemouth Cemetery and for outstanding works
orders.  For Traffic Signals Replacement there was unexpected additional cost for the
replacement of part of the Fochabers traffic signal installation. This resulted in insufficient
funds within the 25/26 financial year to replace a pedestrian crossing that had been
programmed. Budget of £37k is being carried forward to undertake these works. Underspend
of £93k grant funding from the Active Travel Infrastructure Fund will be used as a contribution
towards the Rothes Way and Levelling Up Fund Active Travel projects in 26/27.  
Growth, Planning and Climate Capital Budget 
5.41 Economy and Enterprise Capital – The table below shows Economy and Enterprise Capital
Budget information for 2025/2026 
Project Capital
Budget
2025/
2026
Actual
Expenditure
Q4 
Forecast
Q4 
Actual
Q4
Variance
Funded
Spend
£000s £000s £000s £000s £000s
Town Centre
Initiative
Fund (match
funding FCHS) 
Forres
Conservation
& Heritage
Scheme
304 0 0 0 0
PBIF Place
Based
Investment
(match
funding for
FCHS)
567 368 198 368 -170
TOTAL 871 368 198 368 -170 
Page 131

Page 132

5.42 Forres Conservation and Heritage Scheme (FCHS) is a 5-year delivery programme and no
spend is forecast in 2025/2026. Capital spend will commence on delivery of projects. Actual
Place Based Investment funding (PBIF) spend includes the Town Centre Capital Grant
Scheme and purchase of Former Gordon Arms Hotel.   £202k is allocated to FCHS and will be
carried forward as above. 
5.43 Moray Growth Deal – The table below shows Moray Growth Deal Capital Budget information
for Q4 2025/2026. 
Project Capital
Budget
2025/
2026
Actual
Expenditure
Q4 
Forecast
Q4 
Actual
Q4
Variance 
£000s £000s £000s £000s £000s
Moray Growth
Deal
10,855 5,421 2,841 1,791 1,050 
5.44 Underspend variance predominantly due to two main issues:   
- Cultural Quarter:  Budget allocation was set when the construction procurement
tender was live for Elgin Town Hall.  The tender process elongated due to the use of the
NEC contract x22 clause and the contractors cash flow plan was not available until
Q4.  
- South Street:  Legal activity between partners has taken longer than anticipated,
delaying the start date for construction activity and the ability to draw down funding. 
UHI confirmed that the project entered delivery at the end of March and all parties
signed agreements relating to South Street on 23 April.   
6.  SUMMARY OF IMPLICATIONS 
6.1  The table below shows whether risks and implications apply if the recommendations are
agreed: 
SUBJECT YES NO
Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcome Improvement Plan)  X
Policy and Legal  X
Financial            X 
Risk           X 
Staffing  X
Best Value and Transformation  X
Property  X
Information Communications Technology/Digital  X
Equalities. Social Inclusion and Economic Impact  X
Climate Change, Biodiversity and Sustainability  X 
6.2  Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcomes Improvement Plan (LOIP))
Page 132

Page 133

Improved Collaborative Leadership, as part of continuous improvement through Best
Value, will better enable the Council to fulfil the ambitions set out in its strategic plans. 
a) Links to Council Corporate Plan – The proposals in this report support and contribute
to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following Council Plan
strategic priorities:
☐ Tackle Poverty and Inequality.
☐ Build Stronger Greener Vibrant Economy.
☐ Build Thriving, resilient, empowered Communities.   
b) Links to Local Outcomes Improvement Plan – The proposals in this report support
and contribute to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following
Local Outcomes Improvement Plan priorities:
☐ Developing a diverse, inclusive, and sustainable economy
☐ Building a better future for our children and young people in   Moray.
☐ Empowering and connecting communities.
☐ Improving wellbeing of our population 
6.3  Policy and Legal 
There are no policy or legal implications arising directly from this report.  
6.4  Financial 
The financial implications are highlighted within the report. 
6.5  Risk 
Budget managers are aware of their responsibilities for managing budget allocations and
approval for variance will be sought from Committee in line with the Financial Regulations.  
6.6  Staffing 
There are no staffing implications arising from this report.  
6.7  Best Value and Transformation 
There are no Best Value and Transformation implications arising from this report.  
6.8  Property 
There are no Property implications arising from this report.  
6.9  Information Communications/Technology/Digital 
There are no Communications/ Technology/Digital arising from this report.  
6.10  Equalities, Social Inclusion and Economic Impact 
There are no equalities implications arising from this report because the report informs the
Committee on budget monitoring. Any identified savings proposals referenced in the repot
will be subject to an individual integrated impact assessment (IIA) to identify any specific
impacts where relevant.  
6.11  Climate Change and Biodiversity Impacts 
There are no climate change or Biodiversity impacts arising from this report. Achieving net
zero will have significant implications for future planned capital expenditure. 
7.  CONSULTATION
Page 133

Page 134

7.1  This report has been prepared in consultation with Executive Director Economy, Enterprise
and Operations, Head of Operations and Environment, Head of Growth, Planning and
Climate (Chief Planning Officer), Chief Financial Officer, Service Manager Legal Services,
Equalities Officer, Service Manager Democratic Services, Service Manager, People
Management, Operations and Environment Management Team and Budget Managers.  Any
comments have been taken into consideration. 
8.  BACKGROUND PAPERS  
8.1  None. 
Page 134

Page 135

Report to: Economic
Development and
Infrastructure Services
Committee 
Meeting Date: 16 June 2026  
Report by: Executive Director, Economy, Enterprise and Operations 
Author: Suzanne Wilson Contact
Email:
performance@moray.gov.uk 
Subject: Performance Report (Growth, Planning and Climate) – Period to March
2026 
1.  PURPOSE 
☒ For Decision      ☐  For Information 
1.1  The purpose of this report is to scrutinise performance in areas of Service
Planning, Service Performance and other related data to the end of March 2026
and note actions being taken to improve performance where required.  
1.2  This report is submitted to Committee in terms of Section III (A) (4) of the
Council’s Scheme of Administration to monitor performance in accordance with
the Council’s Performance Management Framework.  
2.  SUMMARY  
2.1  At the end of March 2026, actions relating to the Growth, Planning and Climate
Service Plan for 2025-28 was 52% complete.  Progress against Service Plan
Priorities and operational Service Performance Indicators is presented in the
table and charts below.  Planning related actions are included in the overall
achievement percentage; however detailed exception reporting of these will be
presented to the Planning & Regulatory Services Committee on 02 July 2026. 
2.2  In response to questions around RAG tables and charts, an annotation prompt
sheet giving clarity on the data presented is available here. 
Item 11.
Page 135

Page 136

3.  RECOMMENDATIONS  
3.1  It is recommended that Committee; 
i) scrutinises and notes performance in areas of Service Planning,
Service Performance and other related data to the end of March
2026; and
ii) notes actions being taken to improve performance where
required.   
Page 136

Page 137

Suzanne Wilson
Research and Information Officer 
4.  BACKGROUND AND CONTEXT  
4.1  Each service plan sets out the planned strategic and service level priorities
and outcomes it intends to deliver in the coming year aligning closely with
financial planning, corporate and community planning partnership strategic
priorities.   
4.2  Service Plan actions are weighted to reflect priority ratings.  Actions with higher
priorities receive greater weightings which contribute more to the overall
delivery of the Plan.  Progress on Service Plan priorities and outcomes and key
areas of operational performance is reported by exception, highlighting
successes and giving assurances around the challenges and actions to
support.  Links to Service Plan Actions, priority ratings and weightings and
Performance Indicators can be accessed within the background papers
section of this report.  
4.3  Complaints are reported in terms of time taken to respond, outcomes and
learning points.  Links to Complaints tables can be accessed within the
background papers section of this report. 
4.4  Latest Local Government Benchmarking Framework (LGBF) results for 2024/25
are published throughout the year with final refresh of data around June 2026. 
The full suite can be viewed via the LGBF Dashboard.  Published indicators for
this service have been incorporated with the relevant section of this report
depending on whether used to evidence progress against strategic, service
level or service performance priorities.  LGBF indicator targets and RAG status
in the backing tables is now based on ranking thresholds aligning with
exception reporting. 
4.5  The Scottish Local Authorities Economic Development Group (SLAED)
publishes a series of performance measures annually to support local
economic development.  This data, based on returns submitted by each local
authority, aims to; evidence and publicise the contribution economic
development activities make to Scotland’s economy, provide a basis for
collating consistent data to better understand impact and identify areas for
improvement.  SLAED are in the final stages of developing a Performance
Dashboard that will cover all indicators gathered and provide family group and
national comparisons.  This is expected to be available by the end of May.  With
no capacity to complete a separate report, latest data for 2024/25 has been
included within backing tables where appropriate and a summary provided
from paragraph 5.15. 
4.6  The Sustainable Development Statement was approved by the Corporate
Committee on 5 November 2024 (para 16 of the Minute refers).  The Statement
Page 137

Page 138

draws out the way in which sustainable development is embedded in the
Corporate Plan 2024-29 and wider corporate policies, strategies, and plans
with progress being reported through several updates and reports, one of
which is quarter 4 performance reporting.  Service Plan actions and indicators
that underpin the delivery of Sustainable Development Goals are highlighted in
the backing table documents and comment where relevant is incorporated in
this report.  An overview of progress will be presented in the annual Corporate
Plan progress update. 
5.  PROPOSALS  
Successes – Service Plan Strategic and Service Level Outcomes and
operational Service Performance
5.1  Work is on track with the Moray Growth Deal with the achievement of the
interim target for 7 out of 8 projects to be in delivery by the end of March.  The
Strategic Outline Case for the 8th project has been approved by the Programme
Board, with governance approvals and the business case expected to progress
early 2026/27.  (Strategic Level Action EGDS25-28 Strat 4.1) 
5.2  Public feedback was incorporated into the Neighbourhood Board 10-year
Vision and Regeneration Plan and the submission deadline to the UK
Government was successfully met.  Officers will work with board members to
progress this plan through delivery of the Pride in Place programme included in
the Service Plan Year 2 refresh for 2026/27.  (Service Level Action EGD25-28
Serv 5.1.1) 
5.3  All Climate Change actions for 2025/26 are complete.  The Routemap to Net
Zero has been updated, the Biodiversity Strategy 2026-2036 was approved by
Council on 6 May 2026 (item 7 of the Agenda refers) and the Climate Change
Strategy 2025-2035 will be submitted in June.  Just Transition work has
progressed with three projects from the agreed shortlist moving forward to
funding application.  Engagement activities and development of Just Transition
proposals will be the focus of Climate Change work in 2026/27.  (Service Level
Actions EGD25-28 5.3.1-5.3.4) 
5.4  Following the implementation of revised absence management procedures,
the annual recorded absence rate for Growth, Planning and Climate has
decreased significantly from 5.01% in 2024/25 to 2.97% in 2025/26.  During the
same period, the corporate absence rate declined from 6.1% to 5.94%.  This
indicates a strong rate of improvement within the service. To improve absence
monitoring further, data covering days lost per FTE are currently being reviewed
by Human Resources.  (Service Level Action EGD25-28 Serv 5.5, Service Level
PIs EGD001 and EGD001a) 
5.5  Moray remains in the top quartile for two LGBF Performance Indicators linked
to Tackling Climate Change.  C02 emissions from electricity and natural gas
consumption are significantly below both national and family group averages
Page 138

Page 139

with Moray ranked 5th out of 32 authorities for both indicators.  (LGBF PIs
CLIM04 and CLIM05)   
Challenges and actions to support – Service Plan Strategic and Service
Level Outcomes and operational Service Performance
5.6  Delivery of some milestones linked to the Community Wealth Building Strategy
and Action Plan will continue beyond original target timescales.  Progress has
been made to develop a regional Socio-Economic Benefits Plan and, following
approval at Full Council on 25th February (para 9 of the Minute refers), this
work will continue with the support of external consultants funded through
Transformation reserves.  In the meantime, work to increase local and regional
spend has continued with feedback from a recent senior manager workshop
incorporated into the final Centre of Local Economic Strategies (CLES) report
on strengthening community wealth.  A summary of the report’s
recommendations will be provided to a future meeting of this committee. 
(Strategic Level Action EGD25-28 Strat 4.2) 1 
5.7  Although two Employability focused actions progress out with expected due
dates, all locally set performance indicators linked to this work have achieved
target or show an improving trend.  A recent Moray Pathways event brought
together local employers and training providers from a range of sectors,
enabling key stakeholders to identify what is working well and where
improvements can be made.  A roadmap to build on this work is currently being
finalised.  An application for onshore skills funding has been submitted to
further enhance the Sector Based Work Academy Programme (SWAP).  In
addition, recent marketing of the Parents in Poverty project has been effective,
with an increase in recorded referrals.   The School-Aged Childcare Project
continues to expand provision, with additional after school activities currently
in development with Elgin City Football Club.  Both Employability actions will
continue as part of the Service Plan Year 2 refresh for 2026/27.  (Strategic Level
Actions EGD25-28 Strat 4.3 and 4.4, Strategic Level PIs EGD105-108, EGD101
and ENVDV270) 
5.8  Latest LGBF data shows the proportion of people earning less than the Living
Wage increased to 16.2% in 2024/25, up from 14.4% the previous year.  29
authorities returned data for this indicator, with Moray placed 25th nationally
and 7th within the family group.  This indicator covers people working within the
local authority area, not earning the Living Wage; an annually revised,
voluntary wage rate based on the calculated cost of living that can rise sharply
in response to increasing inflation, housing, food and energy costs.  An
increase in those earning less than this rate indicates affordability issues for
both workers and employers.  For workers, it suggests a reduction of jobs in the
area where pay keeps pace with the cost of living, while for employers, it
suggests less may have the ability to pay the living wage.  This could be
particularly relevant for lower margin sectors such as hospitality, food
manufacturing and social care, which are well represented in Moray’s local
economy.  (Strategic Level LGBF PI ECON07) 
Page 139

Page 140

5.9  Unemployed people assisted into work from council programmes has
increased to 10.4% during 2024/25, however with a national average of 14.2%,
Moray remains in the lowest quartile ranked 25th out of 32 authorities. With a
comparator average of 12.6%, Moray is placed 6 out of 8 within the family
group.  Moray Pathways continue to work towards improving access to
employment and training and provides ongoing support through childcare
expansion and other initiatives.  Of the 135 people supported into work in
2024/25, 79% sustained this for over 13 weeks. (Strategic Level LGBF PI
ECON01, SLAED PI OC13) 
5.10  Investment in Economic Development & Tourism (per 1,000 population)
increased slightly during 2024/25 to £89,085 however against a national
average of £138,745, Moray remains in the lowest quartile ranked 25th out of 32
authorities and 8th in the family group.  Work to grow tourism in the area has
progressed with an updated Tourism Strategy awaiting final approval and
projects such as the Cultural Quarter ongoing.  Other tourism related activity
includes the Campervan and Motorhome pilot currently in place at Burghead
following a public consultation.  (Service Level LGBF PI ECON06) 
5.11  Moray is ranked in the lowest quartile for C02 emissions within the scope of
local authority influence (ranked 32nd out of 32 authorities based on 2023/24
data) and C02 emissions from transport (ranked 29th out of 32).  As per
paragraph 5.3, the Routemap to Net Zero has been updated and revised
Climate Change and Biodiversity Strategies are in place.  All take account
amended targets and the pace and level of available investment.  (Service
Level LGBF PIs CLIM02 and CLIM03) 
Complaints and MP/MSP Enquiries
5.12  Due to reporting issues, details of complaints received between January and
March 2026 are not yet available.   
5.13  During the three months to the end of December 2025, Growth, Planning and
Climate closed 12 complaints; six at Frontline, four as Investigative and two
Escalated.  Following investigation, all 12 complaints were closed as not
upheld.   
5.14  Growth, Planning and Climate received 27 MP/MSP enquiries during the
second half of 2025/26, with planning and wildlife concerns the most common
issues. 
Other Performance (not included in the Service Plan)
5.15  Data published by the Scottish Local Authorities Economic Development
(SLAED) Performance Framework for 2024/25 highlights positive trends across
several key indicators.  Overall Economic Development & Tourism expenditure
increased to £8,464,000 due to higher revenue spend.  The number of
businesses supported through Economic Development activity increased
Page 140

Page 141

alongside improvements with both the number of Business Gateway unique
customer accounts and participation in council funded employability
activities.  (SLAED I1, SLAED OP1, OP2 and OP4) 
5.16  The significant increase in reported additional external funding to £42,924,000
reflects successful bids associated with the final year of the UK Shared
Prosperity Fund, Place Based Investment Fund, Levelling Up Fund, Plan for
Neighbourhoods and the Coastal Community Fund.  (SLAED OC11) 
5.17  Employment increased from 71.9% to 74.8%; slightly above both the family
group and national averages while Gross Value Added per capita increased
above the family group average to £28,220 (based on available 2023 data). 
(SLAED OC3 and OC1) 
5.18  Workforce based Gross Median Weekly earnings (measuring pay by location of
employment and indicating local job market strength) rose by 11% to £762.70;
above the national average of £760.97.  Residence based Gross Median
Weekly earnings (measuring pay by where employees live, reflecting local
resident wealth) also improved, rising 3% to £658.80, however this remains
significantly below both family and national averages.  Although these
increases are to be welcomed, they should be considered alongside the
increase in those earning less than the living wage (paragraph 5.7 refers) which
suggests recent pay growth has not been evenly distributed.  (SLAED OC2a and
OC2b) 
5.19  Worsening short term trends were evident with business start-ups and the 3-
year business survival rate however attendees at Business Gateway events and
the number of companies registered with the Supplier Development
Programme increased slightly. (SLAED OC4, OC5, A1 and A3) 
5.20  The proportion of working age population with no qualifications also rose
sharply from 7.6% in 2023/24 to 13.8% in 2024/25.  Source data shows the
number of individuals involved increased from 4,500 to 8,200 with no change
in the overall working age population.  Across all authorities, Moray was one of
seven to record a significant increase during 2024/25.  This increase does not
however appear to represent a long-term trend.  More recent data, not yet
published by SLAED but available via NOMIS, indicates that during 2025, the
number of working age individuals with no qualifications, fell to 3,600,
representing 6% of the working age population. This sharp fall in 2025 to below
the 2023/24 baseline suggests the one-year increase is likely a statistical
issue.  Data for this indicator is taken from the ONS Annual Population Survey
and is based on respondent answers from a relatively small sample size which,
for smaller geographies like Moray, can lead to subject volatility.  (SLAED OC7) 
Case Studies
5.21  The Progress for Parents project, delivered by Moray Pathways in partnership
with the Employability Team and Community Learning and Development (Adult
Page 141

Page 142

& Family Learning), was recognised at the recent Learning Partnership Awards
in February, receiving the Family Learning Award.  This project, initially
launched in Buckie, provides person-centred support to parents enabling them
to overcome personal challenges and progress into volunteering, training or
employment.  Following on from this success, sessions are now also available
in Forres and Lossiemouth with expansion into Elgin planned for late 2026.   
5.22  When the Cultural Quarter Project Full Business Case (FBC) was considered at
Moray Council on 4 December 2024, approval was granted to fully fund phase
1 (Elgin Town Hall), with all remaining funding applied to phase 2 (Grant Lodge). 
At this time, £4.2m of Growth Deal funding was available.  Subsequently,
during 2025/26, £4.7m of external funding has either been secured or is at a
second stage of approval.  This increases the funding available for the
restoration of Grant Lodge to 79% of the full project cost.  Alongside this, the
Project Team also helped the Grant Lodge Trust secure £10k from the
Architectural Heritage Fund.  This will be used during 2026/27 to appoint a
Development Officer to assist in developing a fundraising plan, update the
business plan for Grant Lodge and support capacity building and improved
governance for the Board.  The project team will provide an update to Council
in Quarter 3 2026/27 and seek approval for next steps with the project.   
Consultation and Engagement
5.23  During the reporting period, public consultation was undertaken through
Moray Engage for the Climate Change and Biodiversity Strategies, allowing
additional information such as interactive maps to be shared.  A good
response was received, particularly in relation to Biodiversity, with comments
and suggestions incorporated into final versions of both plans.  Moray Engage
was also the platform used to support the successful Coastal Community
Fund public vote, with 5,000 visitors to the page and over 2,600 engaging in the
final vote. 
6.  SUMMARY OF IMPLICATIONS  
6.1  The table below shows whether risks and implications apply if the
recommendations are agreed: 
SUBJECT YES NO
Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcome Improvement Plan) X 
Policy and Legal  X
Financial  X
Risk  X
Staffing  X
Best Value and Transformation  X
Property  X
Information Communications Technology/Digital  X
Page 142

Page 143

Equalities. Social Inclusion and Economic Impact   X
Climate Change and Biodiversity Impact  X 
6.2  Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcomes Improvement Plan
(LOIP))
Improved Collaborative Leadership, as part of continuous improvement
through Best Value, will better enable the Council to fulfil the ambitions set
out in its strategic plans. 
a) Links to Council Corporate Plan – The proposals in this report support and
contribute to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the
following Council Plan strategic priorities:
☐ Tackle Poverty and Inequality.
☒ Build Stronger Greener Vibrant Economy.
☒ Build Thriving, resilient, empowered Communities.   
b) Links to Local Outcomes Improvement Plan – The proposals in this report
support and contribute to improved outcomes for communities as
outlined in the following local Outcomes Improvement Plan priorities:
☒ Developing a diverse, inclusive, and sustainable economy
☐ Building a better future for our children and young people in  
Moray.
☐ Empowering and connecting communities.
☐ Improving wellbeing of our population 
6.3  Policy and Legal 
The Council has a statutory requirement to publish a range of information that
will demonstrate that it is securing best value and assist in comparing
performance both over time and between authorities where appropriate.  
6.4  Financial 
None arising from this report.  
6.5  Risk 
None arising from this report.  
6.6  Staffing 
None arising from this report.  
6.7  Best Value and Transformation 
How councils plan for, manage and report on performance is a key area of
focus in external audit work, particularly on best value.  
6.8  Property 
None arising from this report.  
6.9  Information Communications/Technology/Digital
Page 143

Page 144

None arising from this report.  
6.10  Equalities, Social Inclusion and Economic Impact 
None arising from this report.  
6.11  Climate Change and Biodiversity Impacts 
None arising from this report. 
7.  CONSULTATION  
7.1  This report has been prepared in consultation with the Head of Growth,
Planning and Climate (Chief Planning Officer), relevant Service Managers
and Lissa Rowan, Committee Services Officer and any comments made
have been incorporated. 
8.  BACKGROUND PAPERS  
8.1  Service Plan Actions
Service Plan Performance Indicators
Service Performance Indicators 
Service Complaints 
Page 144

Page 145

Report to: Economic
Development and
Infrastructure Services
Committee 
Meeting Date: 16 June 2026  
Report by: Executive Director, Economy, Enterprise and Operations 
Author: Suzanne Wilson Contact
Email:
performance@moray.gov.uk 
Subject: Performance Report (Operations and Environment) – Period to March
2026 
1.  PURPOSE 
☒ For Decision      ☐  For Information 
1.1  The purpose of this report is to scrutinise performance in areas of Service
Planning, Service Performance and other related data to the end of March 2026
and note actions being taken to improve performance where required.  
1.2  This report is submitted to Committee in terms of Section III (A) (4) of the
Council’s Scheme of Administration to monitor performance in accordance with
the Council’s Performance Management Framework.  
2.  SUMMARY  
2.1  At the end of March 2026, actions relating planned work against the
Operations and Environment Service Plan for 2025-28 was 92% complete. 
Progress against Service Plan Priorities and operational Service Performance
Indicators is presented in the table and charts below. 
2.2  In response to questions around RAG tables and charts, an annotation prompt
sheet giving clarity on the data presented is available here. 
Item 12.
Page 145

Page 146

3.  RECOMMENDATIONS  
3.1  It is recommended that Committee;
i) scrutinises and notes performance in areas of Service Planning,
Service Performance and other related data to the end of March
2026; and 
ii) notes actions being taken to improve performance where
required.   
Suzanne Wilson
Research and Information Officer 
Page 146

Page 147

4.  BACKGROUND AND CONTEXT  
4.1  Each service plan sets out the planned strategic and service level priorities
and outcomes it intends to deliver in the coming year aligning closely with
financial planning, corporate and community planning partnership strategic
priorities.   
4.2  Service Plan actions are weighted to reflect priority ratings.  Actions with higher
priorities receive greater weightings which contribute more to the overall
delivery of the Plan.  Progress on Service Plan priorities and outcomes and key
areas of operational performance is reported by exception, highlighting
successes and giving assurances around the challenges and actions to
support.  Links to Service Plan Actions, priority ratings and weightings and
Performance Indicators can be accessed within the background papers
section of this report.  
4.3  Complaints are reported in terms of time taken to respond, outcomes and
learning points.  Links to Complaints tables can be accessed within the
background papers section of this report. 
4.4  Latest Local Government Benchmarking Framework (LGBF) results for 2024/25
are published throughout the year with final refresh of data around June 2026. 
The full suite can be viewed via the LGBF Dashboard.  Published indicators for
this service have been incorporated with the relevant section of this report
depending on whether used to evidence progress against strategic, service
level or service performance priorities.  LGBF indicator targets and RAG status
in the backing tables is now based on ranking thresholds aligning with
exception reporting. 
4.5  The Sustainable Development Statement was approved by the Corporate
Committee on 5 November 2024 (para 16 of the Minute refers).  The Statement
draws out the way in which sustainable development is embedded in the
Corporate Plan 2024-29 and wider corporate policies, strategies, and plans
with progress being reported through several updates and reports, one of
which is quarter 4 performance reporting.  Service Plan actions and indicators
that underpin the delivery of Sustainable Development Goals are highlighted in
the backing table documents and comment where relevant is incorporated in
this report.  An overview of progress will be presented in the annual Corporate
Plan progress update. 
5.  PROPOSALS  
Successes – Service Plan Strategic and Service Level Outcomes and
operational Service Performance
5.1  All planned milestones for Phase 2 of the Bus Revolution project have been
achieved with the Speyside weekend service now fully operational.  In addition,
AI simulation work is complete providing robust, data led insights that will
Page 147

Page 148

inform future operational decisions and strategic planning across the
programme.  Work now progresses to Phase 3 which will be monitored as part
of the Service Plan Year 2 refresh.  (Strategic Level Action ECS25-28 Strat 4.1) 
5.2  Two Asset Management actions linked to Consultancy completed as planned. 
Following approval by this committee on 10th March 2026, a new prioritisation
methodology for non-network bridges has been implemented, enabling clear
spend priorities for the available budget.  In addition, the rate of Principal
Inspections undertaken on the council’s network bridges has improved with 66
undertaken during 2025/26 along with a further five retaining wall inspections.
(Service Level Actions ECS25-28 Serv 5.1.2 and 5.1.3 and Service Level PI
ECSCON01) 
5.3  Following an efficiency review of the Winter Maintenance programme, the
Winter Service Operational Plan was updated within agreed timescales,
ensuring improved service delivery and compliance with regulatory measures.
(Service Level Action ECS25-28 Serv 5.2.2)   
5.4  A review of the Coastal Adaption Plan, finalised in 2025, concluded no interim
report is required at this stage.  Instead, focus will move to delivering a final
report in line with the Flood Risk Management Cycle.  An action covering this
work is included in the Service Plan Year 2 refresh for 2026/27.  (Service Level
Action ECS25-28 Serv 5.2.6) 
5.5  Following the implementation of revised absence management procedures,
the annual recorded absence rate for Operations and Environment has fallen
from 7.26% in 2024/25 to 6.65% in 2025/26.  During the same period, the
corporate absence rate declined from 6.1% to 5.94%.  This indicates a strong
rate of improvement within the service against the Council overall.  To support
further improvements, data covering days lost per full time equivalent (FTE) is
currently being reviewed by Human Resources.  (Service Level Action ECS25-
28 Serv 5.6.1 and Service Level PIs ECS001 and ECS001a) 
5.6  During quarter 4, the Travel Tracker programme remained at full capacity with
the maximum number of schools registered.  As a result, the number of active
journeys in Moray reached the highest level to date at 123,323.  Looking ahead,
changes to funding arrangements between HITRANS and Living Streets mean
the Travel Tracker programme will be discontinued.  At this stage, a
replacement programme is yet to be confirmed.  (Service Level PI ECSTTM05) 
5.7  All four Compliance & Efficiency performance indicators linked to the pool car
scheme, have improved and achieved or exceeded targets.  Grey mileage
claims by council staff have declined in line with an increase in total mileage
undertaken by pool cars.  As a result, net savings achieved during the year have
increased from £81,215 to £95,516.  (Service Level PIs ECSRMF03, 19, 20 and
21) 
Page 148

Page 149

5.8  Four LGBF cost indicators relating to Operations and Environment remain in
the top quartile.  Net cost of waste collections per premise was £35.10, well
below the national average of £77.26 ranking Moray 2nd nationally and 1st in
the family group.  Net cost of street cleaning per 1,000 population was £8,083
against the national average of £17,869 ranking Moray 2nd nationally and 1st in
the family group.  Cost of maintaining roads per kilometre was £6,827
compared to £13,629 nationally, placing Moray 5th and 1st in the family group. 
Cost of parks and open spaces was £16,882 against a national average of
£21,998 with Moray ranking 8th against all other authorities and 2nd against
the family group.  Overlaying cost indicators against performance around
recycling rates and road condition reinforces the positive efforts of the service.
(Service PIs ENV01a, ENV03a, ENV04a, C&L04, ENV06 and ENV04d)   
Challenges and actions to support – Service Plan Strategic and Service
Level Outcomes and operational Service Performance
5.9  Two actions to improve the Asset Management of Open Spaces progress out
with target timescales.  Due to competing work demands, the development of
a Tree Strategy remains ongoing and will be carried forward into the Service
Plan Year 2 refresh.  Following some initial delays, construction is complete at
the new cemetery on Linkwood Road with only minor works now ongoing
however due to remaining capacity at Elgin Cemetery, burials at the site are
expected later than initially forecast, commencing early 2027. (Service Level
Actions ECS25-28 Serv 5.1.4 and 5.1.5)     
5.10  Two milestones associated with the Climate Change action to transition to low
carbon material on the road network have fallen behind original target
timescales.  Trials of materials, originally scheduled to complete by the end of
December, were delayed due to supply issues.  This in turn impacted the
completion of the planned evaluation of costs, savings and performance.  This
work will be carried forward into 2026/27 as part of the Year 2 refresh of the
Service Plan. (Service Level Action ECS25-28 Serv 5.2.1) 
5.11  All four Compliance and Efficiency actions are progressing out with original
due dates.  Revised burial administration procedures are in place however
work to implement a digitised system remains ongoing and is now expected by
summer 2026.  The management of the pool car scheme has been reviewed
resulting in service improvements (paragraph 5.6 refers) though further
progress has stalled due to ongoing officer recruitment.  A project mandate for
improvements to the Tranman stores system has been submitted however next
steps are dependent on ICT availability.  PSIF work involving the Waste Service
is complete but due to operational issues, the workshop for Transportation has
been re-scheduled to quarter 1 2026/27.  Work to progress the Tranman
system and PSIF, will continue as part of the Service Plan Year 2 refresh. 
(Service Level Actions ECS25-28 5.3.1 – 5.3.4)   
5.12  Passenger journeys for the m.connect service have been lower than
anticipated.  During quarter 4, a total of 20,391 journeys were recorded, 14%
Page 149

Page 150

below the quarterly target of 23,767.  A review of the monthly breakdown
shows that January recorded particularly low usage at 5,605 journeys.  This can
be attributed to the adverse weather conditions during this time including
travel warnings that led to service cancellations and route changes.  In
contrast, March recorded 7,919 journeys, the highest monthly total since the
service was expanded.  With phase 2 now complete and planning underway for
Phase 3, it is anticipated passenger numbers will continue to improve.  Net
Unit Cost per passenger for the second half of the year are also reported above
target however these do not yet include Network Support Grant income. 
Figures will be revised once all subsidies are applied. (Strategic Level PI
ECSPT02, Service PI ECSTPT01) 
5.13  Although annual unit cost per vehicle and plant maintenance remains below
target for the year overall, a notable increase was recorded during quarter 4
with costs averaging £288 per unit, 15% above the quarterly target. This
increase has been attributed to the extended life cycles of vehicles arising
from limitations on capital spend.  (Service PI ECSRMF01) 
5.14  Latest LGBF data for 2024/25 shows satisfaction with refuse collections
declined slightly to 75.3%.  This is below the national and family group
averages of 78.3% and 79%, placing Moray in the lowest quartile, ranked 25th
out of the 32 authorities national and 7th in the family group of eight authorities. 
Data for this indicator is taken from the Scottish Household Survey which has
limitations in sample size.  Performance should be set against the positive
performance reported for recycling rates and waste collection costs.  There
has also been a recent notable improvement in Household Collection
complaints.  Following a review of complaints in late 2024, several procedural
changes were introduced resulting in a 44% reduction in complaints, from 117
in 2024/25 to 66 in 2025/26.  (Service PI ENV07a) 
Complaints and MP/MSP Enquiries
5.15  During the six months to the end of March 2026, Operations and Environment
closed 94 complaints: 82 at Frontline and 12 as Investigative.  Response times
for all stages were well within Complaint Handling targets, with Frontline
complaints closed within an average of 3.5 days and Investigative within 15.6.   
5.16  Although the proportion of closed complaints that were upheld, partially
upheld or resolved increased to 54%, this remains below the level recorded
prior to the complaint review during the half year to September 2024.   
Page 150

Page 151

5.17  16 complaints that were either upheld, partially upheld or resolved, related to
staff actions or behaviour including conduct when speaking to members of the
public.  In these cases, apologies were issued, expected customer service
standards were reinforced and refresher training was arranged where
necessary.  Missed bins accounted for eight complaints, seven of which were
due to crew error.  All crews have been reminded of the various route
requirements, including assisted collections.   
5.18  During the reporting period, five complaints relating to winter maintenance
were received, two during the particularly bad period of winter weather in early
January.  In total, three were upheld; two linked to damage to private property
following gritting work and one due to staff behaviour.   
5.19  Operations and Environment also received 72 MP/MSP enquiries with winter
maintenance, road safety and the collapse of the Spey Viaduct the most
common issues. 
Other Performance (not included in the Service Plan)
5.20  The Building Cleaning Service were finalists in both the Best Performer and
Most Improved Performer categories of the 2025 APSE Performance Network
Awards in November.  Although not successful on the night, the awards involve
over 170 local authorities from across the UK and finalist status reflects the
high standard of performance and improvement achieved by the service. 
Case Studies
5.21  Work to transform Fleet Services has focused on two main areas; workforce
development and digital transformation.   
5.22  The team has long managed a complex and diverse specialist fleet, requiring
high levels of technical competence across mechanical, electrical and
hydraulic systems.  With the move towards an electric fleet and a sector wide
national shortage of qualified heavy vehicle mechanics, the need to develop a
highly skilled and adaptable workforce was identified as central to maintaining
safe, efficient and sustainable operations.
Page 151

Page 152

5.23  Staff have undergone EV training and upskilling from light to heavy vehicles
through the introduction of a structured programme of EV qualifications,
compliance training and workshop modernisation. These steps were taken to
enhance safety, strengthen technical capability, reduce reliance on
subcontractors, and deliver a more efficient, confident and future-ready
workshop.   
5.24  All mechanics have achieved IMI Level 3 EV qualifications, and two light
vehicle mechanics have progressed to fully qualified heavy mechanics.
Current and former light vehicle mechanics continue to be rotated with
experienced heavy mechanics to accelerate practical learning and support
long-term succession planning. Staff have also completed specialist
manufacturer training with Operator Licence (O Licence) and Tachograph
training rolled out across the team, reinforcing legal responsibilities and safety
standards. 
5.25  The team has also taken a proactive role in supporting young people into the
industry by offering a structured apprenticeship programme with high-quality
training, mentoring and hands-on workshop experience. 
5.26  Digital transformation work has included strengthening the use of telematics
and introducing workshop tablets to modernise job recording and inspection
processes. These improvements have enhanced the way information is
managed, reduced administration time, improved accuracy and supported
real-time workload management allowing informed operational decisions to
be made. 
Consultation and Engagement
5.27  During quarter 3, Catering issued three surveys to gather feedback on the
school meal service.  In total, over 1,200 responses were received with
comments and suggestions helped shape both service delivery and the next
menu cycle.    
6.  SUMMARY OF IMPLICATIONS  
6.1  The table below shows whether risks and implications apply if the
recommendations are agreed: 
SUBJECT YES NO
Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcome Improvement Plan) X 
Policy and Legal  X
Financial  X
Risk  X
Staffing  X
Best Value and Transformation  X
Property  X
Page 152

Page 153

Information Communications Technology/Digital  X
Equalities. Social Inclusion and Economic Impact   X
Climate Change and Biodiversity Impact  X 
6.2  Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcomes Improvement Plan
(LOIP))
Improved Collaborative Leadership, as part of continuous improvement
through Best Value, will better enable the Council to fulfil the ambitions set
out in its strategic plans. 
a) Links to Council Corporate Plan – The proposals in this report support and
contribute to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the
following Council Plan strategic priorities:
☐ Tackle Poverty and Inequality.
☒ Build Stronger Greener Vibrant Economy.
☒ Build Thriving, resilient, empowered Communities.   
b) Links to Local Outcomes Improvement Plan – The proposals in this report
support and contribute to improved outcomes for communities as
outlined in the following local Outcomes Improvement Plan priorities:
☐ Developing a diverse, inclusive, and sustainable economy
☐ Building a better future for our children and young people in  
Moray.
☒ Empowering and connecting communities.
☐ Improving wellbeing of our population 
6.3  Policy and Legal 
The Council has a statutory requirement to publish a range of information that
will demonstrate that it is securing best value and assist in comparing
performance both over time and between authorities where appropriate.  
6.4  Financial 
None arising from this report.  
6.5  Risk 
None arising from this report.  
6.6  Staffing 
None arising from this report.  
6.7  Best Value and Transformation 
How councils plan for, manage and report on performance is a key area of
focus in external audit work, particularly on best value.  
6.8  Property 
None arising from this report.  
Page 153

Page 154

6.9  Information Communications/Technology/Digital 
None arising from this report.  
6.10  Equalities, Social Inclusion and Economic Impact 
None arising from this report.  
6.11  Climate Change and Biodiversity Impacts 
None arising from this report. 
7.  CONSULTATION  
7.1  This report has been prepared in consultation with the Head of Operations
and Environment, relevant Service Managers and Lissa Rowan, Committee
Services Officer and any comments made have been incorporated. 
8.  BACKGROUND PAPERS  
8.1  Service Plan Actions
Service Plan Performance Indicators
Service Performance Indicators 
Service Complaints 
Page 154

Page 155

Report to: Economic Development
and Infrastructure
Services Committee 
Meeting Date: 16 June 2026  
Report by: Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations      
Author: Mark Atherton  Contact Email: mark.atherton@moray.gov.uk 
Subject: Goods Vehicle Operator’s Licence – Statutory Obligations and Proposed
Policy Position 
1.  PURPOSE 
☐ For Decision      ☒  For Information 
1.1  This report informs Committee of Moray Council’s statutory obligations as a licensed
Goods Vehicle Operator and sets out the Councils statutory position and governance
arrangements that are contained within the updated Goods Vehicle Operator’s Licence
(GVOL) Policy.  
1.2  This report is submitted to this Committee in terms of Section III (F) 15 of the Council's
Scheme of Administration relating to the function of the Council as Roads Authority.  
2.  SUMMARY  
2.1  This report is for information only. It sets out that Moray Council holds a Goods Vehicle
Operator’s Licence permitting the operation of vehicles over 3.5 tonnes. Members are
asked to note the Councils statutory obligations, note the updated GVOL Policy (see
Appendix 1) and support its corporate adoption. 
3.  BACKGROUND AND CONTEXT  
3.1 Moray Council holds a Goods Vehicle Operator’s Licence permitting the operation of
vehicles over 3.5 tonnes. The Council must comply with statutory undertakings relating to
vehicle safety, maintenance, record keeping and operating centres. The updated GVOL
Policy (Appendix 1) outlines responsibilities across senior officers, Transport Managers,
Fleet Services, operational managers and drivers. 
Page 155

Page 156

4.  STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS  
4.1 The Council must comply with undertakings including adherence to drivers’ hours rules,
maintenance standards, defect reporting, record retention, overloading prevention, use of
authorised operating centres, and notifications to the Traffic Commissioner.  
5. ORGANISATIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES  
5.1 The GVOL Policy defines responsibilities for senior management, Transport Managers,
Fleet Services compliance roles, operational managers, supervisors and drivers to ensure
full legal compliance. Appendix 1 outlines the Councils roles and responsibilities.  
6. STATUTORY POSITION 
6.1 The GVOL policy establishes a corporate compliance framework, governance system and
monitoring arrangements, including a mandatory two year review cycle.  
7. GOVERNANCE, MONITORING AND REPORTING  
7.1 The Fleet Manager will provide quarterly compliance reporting, oversee KPIs, audit
maintenance arrangements and ensure continuous review of operator licence
requirements.  
8. SUMMARY OF IMPLICATIONS  
8.1 The table below shows whether risks and implications apply if the recommendations are
agreed: 
SUBJECT YES NO
Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcome Improvement Plan) x 
Policy and Legal x 
Financial  x
Risk x 
Staffing  x
Best Value and Transformation x 
Property  x
Information Communications Technology/Digital  x
Equalities. Social Inclusion and Economic Impact   x
Climate Change and Biodiversity Impact x 
8.2 Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcomes Improvement Plan (LOIP))
Improved Collaborative Leadership, as part of continuous improvement through Best
Value, will better enable the Council to fulfil the ambitions set out in its strategic plans. 
a) Links to Council Corporate Plan – The proposals in this report support and contribute
to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following Council Plan
strategic priorities:
☐ Tackle Poverty and Inequality.
Page 156

Page 157

☒ Build Stronger Greener Vibrant Economy.
☐ Build Thriving, resilient, empowered Communities.   
b) Links to Local Outcomes Improvement Plan – The proposals in this report support
and contribute to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following
Local Outcomes Improvement Plan priorities:
☐ Developing a diverse, inclusive, and sustainable economy
☐ Building a better future for our children and young people in   Moray.
☒ Empowering and connecting communities.
☐ Improving wellbeing of our population 
8.3 Policy and Legal 
Legal compliance is strengthened, staffing roles are clarified, and risks associated with
potential licence revocation are mitigated.  
8.4 Financial 
There are no immediate financial implications in adopting this policy. 
One off Costs:
Service
Area
Budget Budget
Years
Proposed
Spend this
Year
Virement
From
Other
Comments
Fleet
Services
No one off
costs as a
result of
this info
report.     
Annually Recurring Costs:
Service
Area
Budget With
Effect
From
Annual
Net
Impact
Virement
From (if
applicable)
Other
Comments       
8.5 Risk 
The risk to the Council is not adopting this policy document, which is good practice to
have and clearly outlines responsibilities for senior management, Transport Managers,
Fleet Services compliance roles, operational managers, supervisors and drivers to ensure
full legal compliance.  
8.6 Staffing 
No staffing implications.  
8.7 Best Value and Transformation 
None.
Page 157

Page 158

8.8 Property 
None.  
8.9 Information Communications/Technology/Digital 
None.  
8.10 Equalities, Social Inclusion and Economic Impact 
None.  
8.11 Climate Change and Biodiversity Impacts 
None. 
9. CONSULTATION  
9.1 This report has been prepared in consultation with Executive Director Economy, Enterprise
and Operations, Head of Operations and Environment, Chief Financial Officer, Service
Manager Legal Services, Service Manager People Management, Equal Opportunities
Officer, and L Rowan, Committee Services Officer and any comments made have been
incorporated into the report. 
10. BACKGROUND PAPERS  
10.1 None. 
Page 158

Page 159

Appendix 1 
GOODS VEHICLE OPERATOR’S
LICENCE POLICY 
Moray Council is fully committed to upholding both our legal and ethical responsibilities
in relation to vehicle safety. Specifically: 
• As a licensed operator of vehicles exceeding 3.5 tonnes, we are bound by a series
of undertakings designed to ensure our operations remain safe and compliant.
Breaching these undertakings may lead to the suspension, curtailment, or
revocation of our licence, which would prohibit us from operating any goods
vehicles over 3.5 tonnes.
• 
• We are subject to a broad range of legal requirements, with potential penalties
ranging from fixed fines to, in severe cases, imprisonment. 
• We have a duty of care to ensure that our activities do not cause harm or
negatively impact others. 
• As a responsible operator, Moray Council extends the applicable undertakings of
its operator’s licence to all vehicles under its control. This includes full compliance
with legal requirements relating to:
• Safe loading of vehicles
• Adherence to speed limits
• Defect reporting procedures
• Regular maintenance and inspections
This policy, as part of the broader Goods Vehicle Operator’s Licence guidance, outlines
the key responsibilities and organisational structures necessary to ensure we meet our
operator licensing obligations effectively. 
Operator licence undertakings 
• The laws relating to the driving and operation of vehicles used under this licence are
observed. 
• The rules on drivers’ hours and tachographs are observed, proper records are kept
and that these are made available on request. 
• Vehicles and trailers are not overloaded. 
• Vehicles operate within speed limits. 
• Vehicles and trailers, including hired vehicles and trailers, are kept in a fit and
serviceable condition. 
• Drivers report promptly any defects or symptoms of defects that could prevent the
safe operation of vehicles and/or trailers, and that any defects are recorded in
writing. 
• Records are kept (for 15 months) of all driver reports which record defects, all
safety inspections, routine maintenance and repairs to vehicles, and these are
made available on request. 
Page 159

Page 160

• In respect of each operating centre specified, that the number of vehicles and the
number of trailers kept there will not exceed the maximum numbers authorised
at each operating centre (which will be noted on the licence). 
• An unauthorised operating centre is not used in any traffic area. 
• Furthermore, I will notify the Traffic Commissioner of any convictions against
myself, or the company, business partner(s), the company directors, nominated
transport manager(s) named in this application, or employees or agents of the
applicant for this licence and, if the licence is issued, convictions against the licence
holder or employees or agents of the licence holder. 
• I will ensure that the Traffic Commissioner is notified within 28 days of any other
changes, for example a change to the proposed maintenance arrangements; a
change in the financial status of the licence holder (e.g. if placed in liquidation or
receivership), or a change to Limited Company status or partnership, including
changes in the named directors or partners that might affect the licence, if issued. 
• I have an establishment in Great Britain (GB) with premises in which I keep core
business documents. These include (as a minimum) accounting and personnel
management documents and data on driving time and rest. I understand that the use
of a PO Box or third-party address is not permitted. 
Page 160

Page 161

Chief Executive  
Executive Director 
Economy ,  Enterprise 
and Operations  
Executive Director 
Finance ,  Strategy  & 
Transformation    
Executive Director 
Education ,  Housing  & 
Communities  
Chief Officer Moray 
Integrated Joint Board
Head of People ,  Change 
and Community 
Strategy
Head of Customer 
Experience ,  ICT  & 
Digital Services
Chief Financial Officer  
Head of Education
Head of Housing  , 
Property and 
Communities
Service Manager 
Leisure  &  Culture  
Head of Operations    &
Environment
Head of Growth  , 
Planning  &  Climate  
( Chief Planning Officer )
Chief Governance 
Officer  
Head of Service  &  Chief 
Social Work Officer
Head of Service  & 
Depute Chief Officer
Chief Financial Officer    
Service Manager Roads 
&  Fleet
Fleet Services Manager
Fleet Operations  & 
Workshop Manager
Vehicle Maintenance 
Shift Supervisors
Operational Managers
Operational Supervisors
Drivers
Service  Managers
Page 161

Page 162

Key responsibilities for our operator’s licence
undertakings 
Chief Executive and Executive Directors 
• Identify an anticipated change of legal entity of the organization.
• Ensure there is a clear reporting line from the Transport Manager to the licence
holder.
• Identify an anticipated change of establishment of the organization. 
Chief Financial Officer 
• Identify an anticipated change of financial standing of the organization.
• Communicate a change of legal entity of the organisation to the Transport Managers.
• Communicate a change of financial standing of the organisation to the Transport
Managers. 
Payments Manager 
• Ensure our organisation holds appropriate motor vehicle and employer liability
insurance. 
Head of Service 
• Communicate a change of legal entity of the organisation to the Transport Managers.
• Communicate, promote and champion the operator licensing policy.
• Ensure Transport Manager authority to prevent an unroadworthy vehicle or unsafe or
illegal driver from being used is in writing and included in a policy or procedural
document.
• Ensure internal Transport Managers have a genuine link to the organisation (being an
employee, director, owner, or shareholder or administering the undertaking).
• Ensure Transport Managers have authority to prevent an unroadworthy vehicle or
unsafe or illegal driver from being used.
• Ensure Transport Managers are named on operator’s licence. 
Service Manager 
• Communicate a change of financial standing of the organisation to the Transport
Managers.
• Identify an anticipated change of executive directors, owners or partners.
• Communicate a change of executive directors, owners, partners to the Transport
Managers. 
• Communicate, promote and champion the operator licensing policy.
• Communicate a change of establishment of the organisation (core business premises
no longer in GB) to the Transport Managers.
• Ensure there is at least one named person responsible for managing transport.
• Ensure Transport Managers have continuous knowledge of the day-to-day operations
and performance of compliance systems.
• Communicate a change of executive directors to the Transport Managers.
• Establish and review the operator licensing policy.
• Ensure transport management responsibilities are written into Transport Managers’
job description.
Page 162

Page 163

• Ensure job descriptions refer to responsibilities identified in this operator licensing
policy or other document.
• Identify an anticipated change of Transport Managers.
• Communicate a change of Transport Managers to the Head of Service.
• Ensure Transport Managers are competent.
• Detail Transport Manager duties in writing and provide an additional report where
they are responsible for more than 50 vehicles. 
Nominated Transport Managers 
• Identify an anticipated change that would affect the number and type of licences
required. 
• Identify an anticipated change of vehicle access (no longer having access to at least
one vehicle registered or in circulation in GB).
• Identify an anticipated need for new operating centres with Operational Managers.
• Communicate, promote and champion the operator licensing policy.
• Notify a change of legal entity of the organisation to the Traffic Commissioner.
• Ensure the operator’s licences are within their review date.
• Identify the receipt of notification and outcome of a Public Inquiry.
• Notify a change of financial standing of the organisation to the Traffic Commissioner.
• Notify a change of establishment of the organisation (core business premises no
longer in GB) to the Traffic Commissioner.
• Notify a change of vehicle access (no longer having access to at least one vehicle
registered or in circulation in GB) to the Traffic Commissioner.
• Compile and communicate OCRS, KPIs and notifiable incidents to the Head of Service
and Service Manager in a quarterly report.
• Review vehicle limits, centre conditions and parking arrangements are being complied
with and produce an annual report.
• Complete the operator’s licence review/renewal process.
• Process a change that would affect the number and type of operator’s licences
needed with the Central Licensing Office.
• Notify a change of executive directors, owners, partners or Transport Managers to
the Traffic Commissioner.
• Ensure new operating centres are authorised on operator’s licences. 
• Ensure vehicles are specified on operator’s licences within the correct timescales.
• Review vehicle specifications and the vehicle replacement program with operational
managers.
• Notify the Traffic Commissioner of a change in maintenance arrangements.
• Ensure vehicle excise duty is paid on all vehicles.
• Identify notifiable convictions or penalties.
• Advise the Traffic Commissioner about any notifiable convictions or penalties
(together with what have done to avoid re-occurrence).
• Ensure drivers’ hours and working time compliance checks are made. In particular,
produce a monthly report detailing: overdue downloading; calendar gap analysis;
comparison of vehicle unit data against driver card data; average number of
infringements per driver per shift; a summary of any investigations, actions and
reviews.
• Ensure poor performance or deterioration of performance in compliance with drivers’
hours, working time and records is investigated and action taken to prevent re-
occurrence.
• Ensure poor performance or deterioration of performance in compliance with road
traffic rules is investigated and action taken to prevent re-occurrence.
• Identify an anticipated need for a change to maintenance arrangements.
• Communicate changes in maintenance arrangements to the Vehicle Maintenance
Page 163

Page 164

Shift Supervisor.
• Ensure subcontracted maintenance providers employ competent technicians and have
the correct assistance, tools and facilities.
• Review the suitability of maintenance provision on an annual basis.
• Ensure there is a suitable written contract with external maintenance providers.
• Ensure poor performance, deterioration of performance, or incidents (such as
prohibitions) are investigated, action taken to prevent re-occurrence and actions
reviewed.
• Ensure safety inspections and annual tests are planned at least 6 months before they
are due and in line with TC-notified intervals.
• Ensure safety inspection reports contain the minimum required items and
information.
• Retain maintenance records for at least 15 months.
• Ensure electronic records meet the minimum Guide to Maintaining Roadworthiness
requirements.
• Effectively monitor the maintenance of vehicles and trailers. In particular, produce a
monthly report detailing: safety inspection intervals are met; annual tests are carried
out within the relevant timescales; first time annual pass rates for vehicles and
trailers; walk around checks are correctly completed; the performance of external
maintenance providers; a summary of any incidents, investigations, actions and
reviews. 
Compliance Functions – Fleet Services 
• Ensure poor compliance performance, deterioration of performance, or notifiable
incidents are investigated, action taken to prevent re-occurrence and actions
reviewed together with the Transport Managers. 
• Communicate a change to the number and type of licences required to the Transport
Managers.
• Ensure poor compliance performance, deterioration of performance, or notifiable
incidents are investigated, action taken to prevent re-occurrence and actions
reviewed together with Operational and Transport Managers.
• Communicate, promote and champion the operator licensing policy.
• Ensure the number of vehicles used across the operator’s licences does not exceed
the authorised maximums. 
• Review vehicle limits, centre conditions and parking arrangements are being
complied with and produce an annual report with the Transport Manager.
• Review the performance of disc display and withdrawal and produce reports as
required.
• Ensure digital tachograph company cards are obtained.
• Ensure working time records are retained for at least two years.
• Ensure drivers’ hours records are retained for at least 12 months.
• Ensure regular driving entitlement checks are made.
• Monitor Driver CPC expiry dates and renewal.
• Monitor infringements with road traffic rules and inform Transport Managers of the
details to be investigated.
• Ensure drivers have received training in conducting walkaround checks and
understood their responsibilities.
• Ensure drivers have signed to say they have received training on conducting walk
around checks and understood their responsibilities.
• Ensure drivers receive initial and periodic instruction on hours, working time and
records.
• Ensure drivers have obtained digital tachograph driver cards.
• Ensure drivers are entitled to drive (driver licence and Driver CPC) before they drive
for us.
Page 164

Page 165

• Ensure the requirement to comply with road traffic rules, speed limits and mobile
phone/equipment use rules is communicated to drivers.
• Check the details of discs and ensure they are displayed on vehicles or withdrawn as
required.
• Ensure drivers undertake daily walk around checks.
• Ensure drivers report defects promptly.
• Ensure supervisors receive appropriate training so they can organise drivers’ work in
a way which complies with drivers’ hours and working time rules. 
• Assess loads and identify actions to ensure vehicles are not overloaded, are properly
secured and comply with any other relevant legislation (ADR, STGO, waste, etc.)
• Monitor safe and legal loading and ensure poor performance, deterioration of
performance, or incidents are investigated and action taken to prevent re-
occurrence. 
• Ensure tachograph Vehicle Units are downloaded within the appropriate timescales.
• Ensure digital tachograph company cards are used and managed appropriately.
• Ensure digital tachograph driver cards are downloaded within the appropriate
timescales.
• Ensure all drivers’ hours, working time and records infringements or incidents are
investigated and action taken to prevent re-occurrence.
• Ensure all road traffic rule infringements are investigated and action taken to prevent
re-occurrence. 
Operational Managers 
• Communicate a change of vehicle access (no longer having access to at least one
vehicle registered or in circulation in GB) to the Transport Managers. 
• Identify an anticipated need for new operating centres with Transport Managers. 
• Communicate the request for operating centre authorisation to the Transport
Managers.
• Communicate request for changes to operating centre authorisation to the Transport
Managers.
• Review vehicle specifications and vehicle replacement program with Transport
Managers. 
• Ensure working time records are retained for at least two years.
• Ensure drivers’ hours records are retained for at least 12 months.
• Ensure regular driving entitlement checks are made.
• Monitor Driver CPC expiry dates and renewal.
• Ensure the number of vehicles used at each operating centre does not exceed the
authorised maximums.
• Ensure operating centre conditions are met, there continue to be adequate parking
facilities and vehicles are normally parked at their authorised centre(s).
• Identify an anticipated need for new vehicles or changes to vehicle locations.
• Communicate the changes to specified vehicles to the Transport Managers. 
• Check the details of discs and ensure they are displayed on vehicles or withdrawn as
required.
• Ensure drivers undertake daily walk around checks.
• Audit and record drivers walkaround checks to ensure compliance and report findings
and any remedial action taken to the nominated transport manager.
• Ensure drivers report defects promptly.
• Ensure transport supervisors receive appropriate training so they can organise
drivers’ work in a way which complies with drivers’ hours and working time rules.
• Assess loads and identify actions to ensure vehicles are not overloaded, are properly
secured and comply with any other relevant legislation (ADR, STGO, waste, etc.) 
• Monitor safe and legal loading and ensure poor performance, deterioration of
Page 165

Page 166

performance, or incidents are investigated and action taken to prevent re-
occurrence.
• Organise drivers’ work in a way which complies with drivers’ hours and working time
rules. 
• Ensure drivers have sufficient print rolls, charts and/or logbooks.
• Ensure drivers carry and use their digital tachograph driver cards.
• Ensure absence days are correctly accounted for in working time calculations.
• Ensure equipment and speed limiters remain functional between
inspections/calibrations.
• Ensure drivers return charts and/or log books within 42 days and/or the correct
period. 
• Ensure digital tachograph driver cards are downloaded within the appropriate
timescales. 
Frontline Supervisors 
• Review vehicle specifications with operational managers.
• Retain drivers’ hours records for at least 12 months.
• Ensure drivers undertake daily walk around checks and defect reporting procedures.
• Ensure drivers report defects promptly.
• Monitor driver walk around checks to ensure compliance and record findings and any
remedial action taken.
• Ensure that vehicles with safety defects are removed from service until authorised for
use by the vehicle maintenance shift supervisor. 
• Ensure drivers hold the appropriate licence category for any vehicles that are driven.
• Assess loads and identify actions to ensure vehicles are not overloaded, are properly
secured and comply with any other relevant legislation (ADR, STGO, waste, etc.) 
• Monitor safe and legal loading and ensure poor performance, deterioration of
performance, or incidents are investigated and action taken to prevent re-occurrence. 
• Organise drivers’ work in a way which complies with drivers’ hours and working time
rules. 
• Ensure drivers have sufficient print rolls, charts and/or log books.
• Ensure drivers carry and use their digital tachograph driver cards and Drivers CPC
cards.
• Ensure absence days are correctly accounted for in working time calculations.
• Ensure equipment and speed limiters remain functional between
inspections/calibrations.
• Ensure drivers return charts and/or log books within 42 days and/or the correct
period. 
• Ensure digital tachograph driver cards are downloaded within the appropriate
timescales.
• Monitor Driver CPC expiry dates and renewal.
• Ensure the number of vehicles used at each operating centre do not exceed the
authorised maximums.
• Ensure operating centre conditions are met, there continue to be adequate parking
facilities and vehicles are normally parked at their authorised centre(s).
• Identify an anticipated need for new vehicles or changes to vehicle locations.
• Communicate the changes to specified vehicles to the Transport Managers. 
• Check the details of discs and ensure they are displayed on vehicles or withdrawn as
required. 
Vehicle Maintenance Shift Supervisors 
• Check the details of discs and ensure they are displayed on vehicles or withdrawn as
required.
Page 166

Page 167

• Ensure the defect reporting process is followed and drivers report defects promptly.
• Ensure all Moray Council Fleet vehicles whether owned, hired or leased are given a
first use inspection (and a safety inspection if off road longer than planned safety
inspection interval) before they are operated.
• Ensure safety inspections and annual tests are planned at least 6 months before they
are due and in line with TC-notified intervals.
• Ensure safety inspection reports contain the minimum required items and
information.
• Ensure defects and rectification work is recorded in writing.
• Remove unroadworthy vehicles from service and record on profile if long term VOR.
• Retain maintenance records for at least 15 months.
• Ensure electronic records meet the minimum Guide to Maintaining Roadworthiness
requirements.
• Effectively monitor the maintenance of vehicles and trailers.
• Plan tachograph equipment calibration and inspection. 
All Drivers of vehicles over 3.5t 
• Comply with all aspects of the Safe Driving Policy, Traffic Laws, the Highway Code &
Moray Council Drivers Handbook.
• Undertake daily walk around checks & record findings.
• Ensure vehicles are not overloaded, loads are properly secured and comply with any
other relevant legislation.
• Report defects promptly via the defect reporting system and do not use a vehicle with
a safety defect.
• Follow accident & breakdown procedures if required.
• Carry and use digital tachograph driver cards where required.
• Complete a record of full working days using the correct recording method.
• Record absence days so they can be correctly accounted for in working time
calculations.
• Comply with the tachograph driver card policy.
• Return charts and/or log books within 42 days and/or the correct period if applicable.
• Ensure digital tachograph driver card is downloaded within the appropriate timescales
where used. 
All Drivers 
• Comply with all aspects of the Safe Driving Policy, Traffic Laws, the Highway Code &
Moray Council Drivers Handbook.
• Undertake daily walk around checks & record findings.
• Ensure vehicles are not overloaded, loads are properly secured and comply with any
other relevant legislation.
• Report defects promptly via the defect reporting system and do not use a vehicle with
a safety defect.
• Follow accident & breakdown procedures if required.
Further documents – Available at the Fleet Services pages on the intranet 
Operator licence administration manual
GV74 Goods Vehicle Operator Licensing Guide (DVSA) 
The Guide to Maintaining Roadworthiness (DVSA)
Maintenance contractor procurement checklist and standard service level
agreement
Safe Driving Policy
Driver Handbook
Page 167

Page 168

Highway Code
Driver Card Policy
Accident procedure
Breakdown procedure
Disciplinary procedures
Load assessment guide and assessment form
Drivers’ Hours and Tachograph Rules: Goods Vehicles (DVSA) 
Defect reporting and rectification procedure 
Driver walkaround guide 
Review 
This policy will be reviewed:
• when there has been a significant change within the structure of the
organization.
• where the nature or type of operations change.
• following a serious incident of non-compliance.
• as a result of persistent poor compliance KPI performance.
• in any case, after a period of no more than two years. 
Signed …………………………………………………………………………… Date
………………………………………………. 
Chief Executive 
Operators’ Licence Role responsibilities
acknowledgement 
Operators Licence role (e.g. Nominated Transport Manager / Transport Supervisor) 
Job Title (MC Job title e.g. Fleet Service Manager / Driver / Team Leader) 
Name …………………………………………………………………………… 
I understand my role and responsibilities as listed in the Moray Council Goods Vehicle
Operators Licence Policy version ………………………………………………. Dated
………………………………………………. 
Signature …………………………………………………………………………… 
Date ………………………………………………. 
Change 
Page 168

Page 169

Report to: Economic Development
and Infrastructure
Services Committee
Meeting Date: 16 June 2026  
Report by: Executive Director Economy, Enterprise and Operations      
Author: Sophie Ward Contact Email: Sophie.ward@moray.gov.uk 
Subject: Climate Adaptation Benchmarking 2025 
1.  PURPOSE 
☐ For Decision      ☒  For Information 
1.1  The purpose of this report is to note the findings from the most recent climate adaptation
benchmarking assessment.  
1.2  This report is submitted to Committee in terms of Section III (F) (33) of the Council’s
Scheme of Administration relating to reviewing or preparing a Climate Change Strategy to
provide a framework for actions aimed at reducing carbon emissions and actions to
restore biodiversity for submission to the Council.  
2.  SUMMARY  
2.1  All public bodies are required to support the delivery of climate adaptation. This report
outlines the council’s progress in delivering this duty, using tools provided by Adaptation
Scotland to assist in providing a benchmarking process. 
2.2  Positive progress is being made across all areas assessed, with highlights including
stronger representation of adaptation within the updated Climate Change Strategy,
evidence of increased understanding and engagement with the issue across services and
strengthened partnership working. 
2.3  The benchmarking findings will inform priorities for delivery of adaptation actions within
the Climate Change Strategy over the next year, and the assessment shared with
Adaptation Scotland to inform Scottish Government of public sector progress on
delivering the national adaptation plan. 
3.  BACKGROUND AND CONTEXT  
3.1 Scotland’s climate is changing faster than scientists predicted, in some cases by many
decades. At the same time as rapidly reducing carbon emissions to meet net zero, it is
also essential that the unavoidable impacts of climate change are understood and acted
upon. This is referred to as climate adaptation.
Page 169

Page 170

3.2 Adaptation is a legal requirement for local authorities, with the Climate Change (Scotland)
Act 2009 requiring that all public sector organisations ensure their activities and
programming are designed to best support delivery of the Scottish statutory adaptation
programme, and to report progress annually through the Climate Change (Duties of Public
Bodies: Reporting Requirements) (Scotland) Order 2015. Other legislative and policy
drivers, particularly around planning, flood risk and emergency planning also specifically
require climate adaptation to be addressed. 
3.3 The current national adaptation programme, SNAP 3, covers 2024-2029 and aims to meet
the following outcomes:
• Nature connects across our land, settlements, coasts and seas
• Communities are creating climate-resilient, healthy and equitable places
• Public services are collaborating in effective and inclusive adaptation action
• Economies and industries are adapting and realising opportunities in our Just
Transition
• Scotland’s international role supports climate justice and enhanced global action
on climate adaptation  
3.4 SNAP 3 has a strong focus on cross-cutting policies, reflecting the need to work together
to achieve meaningful change and make use of available resources. Many SNAP3
objectives are expected to be delivered by local authorities, including having governance
and physical systems in place to enable resilience to climate impacts and collaborative
adaptation action. Specific adaptation measures under Council responsibility include
Nature Networks, Local Place Plans, Coastal Change Adaptation Plans, and Transport and
Road infrastructure resilience.  
3.5 The Scottish Government’s funded programme, Adaptation Scotland, provides support
and advice to public bodies on how to adapt. The Council is a member of the Public Sector
Adaptation Network which gives us access to additional peer support and information,
and in return we are expected to complete an annual Adaptation Benchmarking
assessment. Feedback from the network indicates that progress across Scottish local
authorities is mixed, with some being several years into dedicated, funded programs, and
others at very early stages or not yet engaging with the programme.  
3.6 The Adaptation Benchmarking assessment helps illustrate an organisation’s adaptation
journey. The first assessment, for 2023, was reported to Moray Council on 25 September
2024 (para 21 of the minute refers) and provided a baseline of the Council’s climate
readiness at the time. Repeating the assessment helps us to consider how we have
progressed over time, what we have achieved, and what areas still need work. The report
will be shared with Adaptation Scotland who aggregate and anonymise all the reports from
public bodies before sharing the results with Scottish Government. The report is therefore
a tool for us to benchmark our own adaptation over time, and for Scottish Government to
assess progress and needs across the public sector. 
3.7 The 2023 benchmarking assessment found that while climate adaptation was well
evidenced in in some key service areas (mostly blue infrastructure related), the
organisation as a whole was in the early stages of adapting. One recommendation was to
carry out a risk assessment exploring the costs of climate impacts on the council. A Local
Climate Impact Profile was produced to accompany the draft Climate Change Strategy
Page 170

Page 171

Update reported to Council on 24 September 2025 (paragraph 12 of the minute refers)
examining the impacts of extreme weather events over the six years between 2018 and
2023. The aim of the document was to increase understanding of how council services are
already affected by climate change and are likely to be in future but did not include a full
risk assessment due to limited staff capacity. The Climate Change Strategy update being
reported to Council on 6 May 2026 demonstrates significant steps being made to embed
adaptation across the organisation and partnership working, including improved
monitoring of adaptation actions. 
4.  BENCHMARKING FINDINGS  
4.1 The benchmarking assessment, included in Appendix 1, is structured around Adaptation
Scotland’s capability framework for public sector adaptation. The capability framework
sets out best practice steps for public bodies to prepare for climate impacts. There are
four capabilities: 
• Understanding the Challenge
• Organisational Culture and Resources
• Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring
• Working Together  
4.2 Organisations should be working on all of these capabilities, though may be at different
stages of maturity for each. A survey was sent out to service managers, with two
information sessions held for those to whom adaptation was new or unclear. Survey
responses were used alongside officer knowledge to complete the benchmarking
assessment, and the draft findings discussed with the informal adaptation working group
attended by six service managers. The completed assessment in Appendix 1 incorporated
their feedback and highlights positive progress across all capabilities following the
previous assessment for 2023. The findings, set out across the four capabilities, are
summarised below.   
Understanding the Challenge
4.3 Adaptation is our adjustment to climate change. By understanding the challenge, we can
make informed decisions based on actual or expected change. To develop this capability,
we must gather evidence on climate risks and vulnerabilities, then integrate these into
internal systems and procedures. Progress highlights include: 
• Completing a Local Climate Impacts Profile (LCLIP) of the Council covering the
period 2018 to 2023.
• A Coastal Change Adaptation Plan was approved in 2024, setting clear triggers for
action to adapt to rising sea levels and changing coastlines for each coastal
locality. 
• Work is underway with priority schools to explore climate risk in school grounds
with pupils and teachers (as reported to this committee on 17 June 2025,
paragraph 12 of the minute refers).
• Cross service staff and member engagement was undertaken for the Climate
Change Strategy update, LCLIP, and more recently at the Leadership Forum.
Services showed evidence of increased understanding of adaptation in the
response to the adaptation survey. 
4.4 Next steps to develop maturity in this capability area: 
Page 171

Page 172

• Use climate scenarios to inform decision making. The application of climate
projections to date has largely been limited to coastal change and flood planning
but this does not reflect the full range of expected climate impacts. 
• Improve service level recording of impacts and develop a central log of these. This
remains a challenge due to varying levels of detail being kept and staff capacity
across services. 
• Progress an organisational climate change risk assessment, using existing staff
resources.
• Continue to increase organisational understanding of the need to adapt. Climate
change understanding remains focused on carbon reduction, but both are
necessary. Managers and those who have this knowledge should be cascading
learning and information.   
4.5 Risks if not progressed: 
• The organisation may be unprepared for impacts that can be predicted with an
increasing degree of certainty. Decision making is largely reactive, where likely
disruption and cost could have been avoided. 
• Incremental changes over time, like rising costs or staff time resulting from climate
trends may be absorbed into service delivery as ‘business as usual’ without being
flagged as additional costs.     
Organisational Culture and Resources
4.6 For adaptation to be successful, it must be supported by organisational culture and be
sufficiently resourced. This capability involves aligning adaptation activities with your
organisation’s priorities, so they become mainstreamed into plans, policies and
procedures, eventually becoming business-as-usual. Progress highlights: 
• Adaptation is more clearly represented in climate change reporting and highlighted
in the Corporate Plan.
• The benchmarking process has identified and engaged key staff across multiple
services.
• Collaboration across services in being progressed, particularly for nature-based
solutions. For example, the Moray Climate Ready Schools project involves officers
from Strategic Planning, Schools, Environmental Protection, and Learning Estate
working together to improve outdoor learning and play environments in schools.   
4.7 Next steps to develop maturity in this capability: 
• Identify resources to plan and deliver adaptation. 
• Build adaptation into service plans so that responsibility for adaptation is clear in
key roles, beyond simply co-ordinating reporting through the Climate Change
Strategy governance structure as it is currently. 
4.8 Risks if not progressed: 
• Adaptation responsibility not explicit in many roles beyond climate change, so may
be overlooked when key decisions are being made. Reliance on other processes
(such as planning policy) does not incentivise mainstreaming of adaptation and
may result in missed opportunities.  
• Lack of resource identified for adaptation limits the council’s ability to forward plan
Page 172

Page 173

and increase preparedness / resilience. 
Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring
4.9 Adaptation requires strategic planning and implementation to achieve outcomes. To
develop this capability requires setting options into an adaptation strategy and action
plan, adopting an approach that maintains flexibility and seeks pathways to resilience. 
4.10 Progress Highlights: 
• Adaptation and SNAP 3 are well reflected in the updated Climate Change Strategy. 
• Win-win / no-regret actions such as coastal change adaptation case studies, Moray
climate ready schools, and Moray Nature Network delivery on council land have
been enabled by Scottish Government funding (Coastal Change Adaptation and
Nature Restoration Funds).
• Developing a monitoring approach that reflects SNAP 3, Public Bodies Climate
Change Duties and the Climate Change Strategy so that reporting will be aligned. 
4.11 Next steps: 
• Close the evidence gap (recording impacts and costs etc) to support strategic
decision making around climate impacts.
• Continue to identify opportunities to identify practical adaptation actions the
council is already taking, or could take, and integrating these under a strategic
approach to delivery. 
• The adaptive pathway approach used in the Climate Change Coastal Plans could
be used to inform the development of wider decision making based on possible
climate futures. 
4.12 Risks if not progressed: 
• The council does not materially adapt to climate impacts but faces increasing
costs and disruption to services that could have been avoided.     
4.13
Working Together
No organisation can adapt alone, by working together we can do more to achieve shared
adaptation outcomes. This capability involves forging connections with key partners to
share ideas and find opportunities to collaborate, benefitting from engaging a diverse
range of external partners to help shape adaptation plans. 
4.14 Progress Highlights: 
• Strong collaboration with Moray CAN with a Moray Climate and Nature Partnership
Plan (area-wide strategy) in development. 
• Funding recently secured from Scottish Government, in partnership with
Aberdeenshire and Aberdeen City Councils, to produce a regional Climate Change
Risk Assessment. 
4.15 Next steps: 
• Embed a cross-sector approach to adaptation in Moray through development of the
forthcoming Moray Climate and Nature Partnership Plan (area-wide strategy) and
encourage collaboration and oversight of adaptation through the Moray Economic
Page 173

Page 174

Partnership subgroup.  
• Identify a programme of work under these partnerships to deliver a multi-agency
adaptation plan. This will involve long term strategic work as well as co-ordination
with emergency responders. 
• Produce regional climate change risk assessment and use findings to
communicate climate risk, identify priorities and opportunities for joint working in
Moray and with neighbouring authorities. This will be a similar exercise to Highland
Adapts’ recent climate change risk and opportunity assessment. 
4.16 Risks: 
• Opportunities to collaborate, pool resources and draw in external funding for Moray
communities may be missed.
• Vulnerable people and communities are likely to be worse affected by impacts
such as extreme weather and rising cost of resources, where these needs could
have been predicted and mitigated against.     
4.17
Summary
The council has made progress across all capabilities since the previous assessment as
shown in the image below. The previous benchmarking exercise for 2023 is shown under
2024 as Adaptation Scotland updated the template since our last assessment. No
assessment was carried out last year due to lack of staff capacity. The Working Together
capability shows the same score since 2024. However, there has been progress in aspects
of this area as well, but they are not apparent because the benchmarking tool was
updated and some tasks re-ordered. 
Using the adaptation capability framework and benchmarking process has facilitated a
structured approach for the council to learn about and progress adaptation, guiding
positive progress and reflection even with limited resources. 
5.  NEXT STEPS  
5.1  To develop organisational maturity in climate adaptation, the next steps highlighted in 4.3
to 4.16 will be progressed in line with the adaptation actions included within the Climate
Change Strategy and within available budget. Updates on the actions within the Climate
Change Strategy will be reported back to the Climate Change Board on a quarterly basis.
Key tasks include continuing to develop an understanding of how the council is likely to be
impacted by climate change in future by carrying out a risk assessment and using different
climate scenarios for decision making. Drawing in evidence from the forthcoming regional
risk assessment and seeking ways to improve recording of climate impacts will support
identifying vulnerabilities and opportunities for action. 
Page 174

Page 175

5.2  Priorities for action will lead on from this work and should focus on a spend to save
approach to adaptation as outlined in the Climate Change Strategy. This will support the
council to shift from reactive short-term actions towards planned long-term investment,
although it is acknowledged that financial forecasting around climate impacts remains a
challenge. As resources and information are developed nationally and locally it is
expected this will become clearer in the future.    
5.3  Engagement across services will continue, with planned activity including working with
the Executive Director – Economy, Finance & Operations to complete Adaptation
Scotland Leader’s Adaptation Checklist, updating local planning guidance for climate
change to better reflect adaptation, and working with Health and Social Care to explore
whether a pilot of the Adaptation Scotland Building Climate-Resilient Social Care:
Guidance for Practitioners tool would be useful. 
5.4  Organisations cannot adapt alone, and the council will continue to work closely with
partners across sectors and the region to co-ordinate understanding of and resilience to
climate impacts through collaborative work.  
6.  SUMMARY OF IMPLICATIONS  
6.1  The table below shows whether risks and implications apply if the recommendations are
agreed: 
SUBJECT YES NO
Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcome Improvement Plan)  X
Policy and Legal  X
Financial  X
Risk  X
Staffing  X
Best Value and Transformation  X
Property  X
Information Communications Technology/Digital  X
Equalities. Social Inclusion and Economic Impact   X
Climate Change and Biodiversity Impact  X 
6.2  Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcomes Improvement Plan (LOIP))
Improved Collaborative Leadership, as part of continuous improvement through Best
Value, will better enable the Council to fulfil the ambitions set out in its strategic plans. 
a) Links to Council Corporate Plan – The proposals in this report support and contribute
to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following Council Plan
strategic priorities:
☐ Tackle Poverty and Inequality.
☐ Build Stronger Greener Vibrant Economy.
☒Build Thriving, resilient, empowered Communities.   
b) Links to Local Outcomes Improvement Plan – The proposals in this report support
and contribute to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the following
Local Outcomes Improvement Plan priorities:
☒Developing a diverse, inclusive, and sustainable economy
☒Building a better future for our children and young people in   Moray.
Page 175

Page 176

☒Empowering and connecting communities.
☒Improving wellbeing of our population 
6.3  Policy and Legal 
The Climate Change (Scotland) Act 2009 requires that all public sector organisations
ensure their activities and programs are designed to best support delivery of the Scottish
statutory adaptation programme and to report progress annually. 
Adaptation Scotland highlights a wide range of legislation, plans and policies relevant to
adaptation, including; 
• Civil Contingencies Act (2004) 
• Flood Risk Management (Scotland) Act 2009 
• Planning (Scotland) Act 2006.  
6.4  Financial 
There are significant difficulties in identifying the costs necessary to adapt to the
changing climate, and in identifying the forecasted costs from climate impacts should
the council fail to adapt. As these costs are identified, a spend to save approach should
be taken in regard to funding adaptation.   
In the future, additional funds will be required to pay for the impacts of climate change. In
order to attempt to reduce this it is important to embed adaptation across the
organisation in a way which it can be delivered as part of multi-benefit solutions. 
6.5  Risk 
Climate change is a serious risk to the Council’s service provision. It poses significant
risks to our health, our economy, our environment and endangers the wellbeing of current
and future generations. There is a risk that avoidable future financial costs could be
incurred by the council if adaptation action is not taken.  
6.6  Staffing 
Information was gathered from across services to produce this report. It was collated by
climate change officers within Strategic Planning and Development, with additional input
from key officers from other services who helped to complete the benchmarking
assessment. 
6.7  Best Value and Transformation 
Contributing to the achievement of sustainable development through continuous
improvement in performance is a key component of the Council’s Best Value duties set
out by the Local Government in Scotland Act 2003. Achieving sustainable development
means meeting the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future
generations to meet their own needs.  
6.8  Property 
There are no property implications arising from this report. However, it is noted that
adapting to climate impacts will require changes to how property is managed in order to
reduce risk and costs in the future.  
6.9  Information Communications/Technology/Digital 
There are no communications, technology or digital implications arising from this report. 
Page 176

Page 177

6.10  Equalities, Social Inclusion and Economic Impact 
There are no equalities, social inclusion and economic implications arising from this
report. However it is noted that climate change most affects those already vulnerable in
society, including those with underlying health conditions, low income/tenancy status,
children and minorities.  
6.11  Climate Change and Biodiversity Impacts 
There are no additional climate change and biodiversity implications arising from this
report. 
7.  CONSULTATION  
7.1  This report has been prepared in consultation with the Executive Director Economy,
Enterprise and Operations, Chief Governance Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Head of
Growth, Planning and Climate, Head of Education, Head of Housing, Property &
Communities, Head of Operations and Environment, Interim Head of Social Work, Head of
People, Change and Community Strategy, and Lissa Rowan (Committee Services Officer)
and any comments made have been incorporated into the report   
8.  BACKGROUND PAPERS  
8.1  Adaptation Benchmarking 2023 Report to Economic Development & Infrastructure
Services Committee on 25th September 2024; Item 13
Adaptation Capability Framework - Adaptation Scotland website
Moray Council Local Climate Impact Profile 2018-2023 
Page 177

Page 178

No embedded text on this page.

Page 179

Cover Sheet
This Benchmarking Tool has been developed to sit alongside the Public Sector Climate Adaptation Capability Framework (Version 2.0).
The tool provides a baseline assessment of your organisation’s current adaptation capabilities and how their development progresses over time.
It highlights which capability areas the organisation is excelling at and others where more work may be needed.
The framework is based on the principle that successful adaptation is not simply a case of better understanding climate data and risk models.
Effective leadership, governance arrangements, inclusive planning approaches and working beyond organisation and sectoral silos
are of equal importance for successful adaptation.
The framework has been developed by the Adaptation Scotland programme in collaboration with practitioners from across Scotland’s public sector.
You can access the Framework and Supporting Guidance at:
Preliminary Questions
Complete the fields below before benchmarking.
Organisation name
Organisation sector
City or region
Current year
Palette for overview of tasks
Table of Contents
Clinking the links below will take you to the relevant section of the workbook.
User Instructions
Overview - Capabilities
Overview - Tasks
Next Tasks
Capability: Understanding the Challenge
Capability: Organisational Culture and Resources
Capability: Strategy Implementation and Monitoring
Capability: Working Together
https://adaptation.scot/take-action/adaptation-capability-framework/
Local Authority
Moray
2025
Red amber green
Moray Council
Appendix 1
Page 179

Page 180

General Usage
Cell and worksheet protection.
Cells are locked and worksheets are protected by default to prevent accidental overwrite of formulas and key information.
If you need to unprotect the sheets you can unprotect by going to 'Review' in the menu bar and clicking 'Unprotect Sheet'.
Please note that if you make changes to the workbook then it may cease to work as intended.
Hyperlinked text.
Hyperlinked text is underlined and will help you navigate to another place in the workbook.
Inputting data.
Throughout this workbook, input cells have been denoted with a border and a pale background colour. They may have tooltips to guide you.
Example on right Example input
Organisation Assessment
There are four capababilities.
'Understanding The Challenge', 'Organisation Culture and Resources', 'Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring', and 'Working Together'.
Each capabilitity has four maturity stages.
'Starting','Intermediate', 'Advanced', and 'Mature'.
Each maturity stage has up to three tasks.
The tasks are unique to each capability and maturity stage.
Steps to Complete
Assess alignment with maturity stage statements.
For each maturity stage, read the statements and select how closely your organisation aligns.
Your choices are, 'Not at all', 'Partly', 'Mostly', and 'Fully'.
Leave any prior year scores unchanged so you can measure your progress over time.
Assess task progress and provide evidence.
Review the tasks and assess their relevance to your organisation, and the current progress of all relevant tasks.
Your choices are, 'Not relevant', 'Not started', 'Ongoing' and 'Complete'.
Note evidence that supports your assessment.
See your results.
There are three worksheets containing summarised results across the capabilities.
The 'Overview - Capabilities' sheet shows your organisation's progress through the maturity stages.
The 'Overview - Tasks' sheet shows your organisation's progress through the tasks.
The 'Next Tasks' sheet is a prioritised list of the tasks your organisation should complete or begin next.
Save outputs to PDF.
Print areas have been set so that you can export each sheet to PDF.
e.g. click link to go back to top of page.
Page 180

Page 181

In the menu choose 'File > Export' or 'File > Print' and then choose 'Print to PDF'.
License
© 2024. Contains public sector information licensed under the Open Government License v3.0
The Adaptation Scotland programme funded by the Scottish Government and delivered by Verture trading as Sniffer.
Scottish Charity No SC022375, Company No SC149513. Registered in Edinburgh.
Registered Office: Caledonian Exchange, 19a Canning Street, Edinburgh, EH3 8HE
Workbook Version v0.08
Workbook development by OnlyExcel:
https://www.onlyexcel.com
http://www.gov.scot/CrownCopyright
Page 181

Page 182

Capability: Understanding The Challenge
Adaptation is our adjustment to climate change, by understanding the challenge we can make informed decisions based on actual or expected change.
By developing this capability you will gather evidence on climate risks and vulnerabilities, then integrate these into internal systems and procedures.
Capability Score
Your Capability Score is an overall score for this capability, calculated automatically based on your scoring of each of the four maturity stages below.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Score (0-4) 1 1.67
Maturity Stage 1: Starting
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation is learning about climate change and its potential impacts in Scotland.
You will have pulled together key information that is most relevant to your organisation – and this is being used to develop a common understanding of potential consequences.
Exploring recent weather events provides insight into how climate change is already affecting your organisation.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Mostly Fully
Score 2 3
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 1: Starting)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify AssessmentDescription
Page 182

Page 183

Capability: Understanding The Challenge
UC1A Complete dd-mmm-yy
Climate projection sources used to inform:
Adaptation benchmarking report published in 2024
Local Climate Impacts Profile (LCLIP) published in 2025
Updated Climate Change Strategy (draft) 2025
Cross service staff and member engagement
Climate e-module listed in core training for all staff
UC1B Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
LCLIP
Climate risk and (nature based) opportunity mapping in
development for larger towns
All Coastal Change Adaptation Plans in place
Flood Risk Management plans in place
Demonstrable increase in understanding of service level
vulnerabilities in benchmarking survey return
UC1C Complete dd-mmm-yy
LCLIP produced
Some service level recording of impacts and evidence of this
being considered during service planning.
Learn about Scotland's changing climate and impacts.
Develop understanding of climate risk and vulnerability.
Record and consider the impact of recent weather events on your organisation.
Page 183

Page 184

Capability: Understanding The Challenge
Maturity Stage 2: Intermediate
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation is building an understanding – and evidence – of potential climate impacts that are specific to your context and linked to strategic and operational priorities.
You are building an evidence base for long-term climate impacts under a range of possible futures.
By engaging stakeholders, you can better understand vulnerabilities specific to your organisation and the communities you work with.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Partly Partly
Score 1 1
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 2: Intermediate)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify Assessment
UC2A Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Engagement for LCLIP and benchmarking
Services able to report how extreme weather in particular needs to
be factored into service and budget planning
UC2B Not started dd-mmm-yy No progress at organisation level (coastal and flood plans detail
scenarios)
UC2C Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Collaborating with Moray CAN (climate hub) to engage
communities
Moray Climate Ready Schools project explores climate risk in
school grounds with pupils and teachers
Description
Map out how your organisation's functions might be affected by climate change.
Engage with stakeholders using participatory approaches.
Consider scenarios for future climate change impacts.
Page 184

Page 185

Capability: Understanding The Challenge
Maturity Stage 3: Advanced
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
You are completing a climate change risk assessment for strategic organisational risks.
Your organisation is embedding knowledge on climate and adaptation into internal systems, enabling routine use by people in their day-to-day roles.
You have an ongoing commitment to stakeholder engagement as your adaptation work progresses.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Not at all Partly
Score 0 1
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 3: Advanced)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify Assessment
UC3A Not started dd-mmm-yy
Funding secured for regional climate change risk assessmentt in
2026 (working with Aberdeenshire and Aberdeen City).
Corporate climate change risk assessment not progressed yet.
UC3B Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
E-module
Staff talks
Workshops (e.g. climate change strategy update)
UC3C Not started dd-mmm-yy Plans for regional risk assessment will progress this. Improve understanding of stakeholder needs.
Description
Carry out climate change risk assessment.
Integrate climate adaptation knowledge into internal training and procedures.
Page 185

Page 186

Capability: Understanding The Challenge
Maturity Stage 4: Mature
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation is assessing climate risk within a wider risk management framework.
You continue to learn and adjust to the climate adaptation challenge, connecting with a wide range of partners to co-produce adaptation solutions.
You are now able to identify knowledge gaps and are working with others to address them.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Not at all Not at all
Score 0 0
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 4: Mature)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify Assessment
UC4A Not started dd-mmm-yy
UC4B Not started dd-mmm-yy
UC4C Not started dd-mmm-yy
Description
Undertake project-level risk assessment.
Mainstream climate change risk assessment.
Identify knowledge gaps, seek expertise and foster links with research and innovation.
Page 186

Page 187

Capability: Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring
Adaptation requires strategic planning and implementation to achieve outcomes.
By developing this capability you will set appraised options into an adaptation strategy and action plan, adopting an approach that maintains flexibility and seeks pathways for an adaptation transition.
Capability Score
Your Capability Score is an overall score for this capability, calculated automatically based on your scoring of each of the four maturity stages below.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Score (0-4) 0.67 1.33
Maturity Stage 1: Starting
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation is able to look at the big picture and see where it can make a contribution to a climate-resilient Scotland.
You have recognised ways that you are already delivering adaptation actions.
Your organisation has developed a clear vision for climate resilience and has defined adaptation outcomes that align with your organisation’s purpose.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Mostly Mostly
Score 2 2
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 1: Starting)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify AssessmentDescription
Page 187

Page 188

Capability: Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring
SIM1A Complete dd-mmm-yy
Contribution to national adaptation programme (SNAP 3) identified
and embedded into updated Climate Change Strategy (currently in
draft). Strategy measures have been aligned with both statutory
climate change reporting and the adaptation capability framework
for ease of reporting. 
SIM1B Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Benchmarking survey returned by 50% of service managers
emailed, most of these able to identify where adaptation is taking
place, or being considered.
SIM1C Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Draft Climate Change Strategy includes a defined adaptation
vision and outcomes/ actions aligned with the adaptation capability
framework.
Consider how you contribute to Scotland's adaptation outcomes.
Identify existing adaptation work within your organisation.
Define strategic adaptation outcomes and/or vision.
Page 188

Page 189

Capability: Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring
Maturity Stage 2: Intermediate
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
You are considering an emerging set of potential adaptation actions and can pull these together into an action plan – while implementing early practical actions.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Not at all Partly
Score 0 1
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 2: Intermediate)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify Assessment
SIM2A Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Local Climate Impact Profile recommendations have been taken
through into the updated Climate Change Strategy delivery plan,
along with with local authority relevant measures from SNAP3.
Major barrier is lack of evidence of forecasted costs for services
under differnt climate scenarios. Not enough able to be recorded -
need support at national level for this (i.e. proxies)
Considered to be early-stage actions, no resources identified to
deliver anything additional.
SIM2B Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Some limited, largely opportunistic, discussions about embedding
adaptation into plans and policies. No strategic approach in place
yet - would need evidence of spend to save benefits, currently not
available.
SIM2C Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Adaptation actions are being delivered in some service areas,
most often as a co-benefit of other projects or policy requirement
(e.g. planning).
Climate ready schools project and coastal change adaptation case
studies are win-win / no-regret actions enabled by Scottish
Government funding (Coastal Change Adaptation and Nature
Restoration Funding). Can be hard to resource non-capital
measures such as education with the public that are essential for
actions to be effective.
No corporate or strategic approach.
Description
Identify a range of potential adaptation actions.
Identify plans, policies and procedures that can include climate adaptation.
Deliver initial adaptation actions.
Page 189

Page 190

Capability: Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring
Maturity Stage 3: Advanced
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation has used an appraisal process to prioritise adaptation actions and develop an adaptation strategy and action plan aligned with your organisation’s adaptation goals/outcomes.
This coordinates and integrates adaptation into relevant projects, policies and plans across your organisation and with partners.
You have developed a monitoring process to track your progress on implementing actions.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Not at all Partly
Score 0 1
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 3: Advanced)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify Assessment
SIM3A Not started dd-mmm-yy
SIM3B Not started dd-mmm-yy
SIM3C Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Mainly the Coastal Change Adaptation Plans.
Monitoring approaches are being developed for the Council's
Biodiversity Strategy and Nature Network, Local Development
Plan.
Corporate annual reporting through Climate Change Strategy (and
aligned with statutory reporting, SNAP3 and adaptation
benchmarking)
Develop a monitoring approach for achieving your adaptation outcomes.
Description
Appraise adaptation options.
Develop an adaptation strategy and action plan.
Page 190

Page 191

Capability: Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring
Maturity Stage 4: Mature
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation is now taking a strategic approach to adaptation, which is becoming business-as-usual as it is mainstreamed into plans, policies and procedures.
You are able to be flexible and allow for uncertainty, adopting an iterative adaptive management cycle and planning into the long-term.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Not at all Not at all
Score 0 0
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 4: Mature)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify Assessment
SIM4A Not started dd-mmm-yy
SIM4B Not started dd-mmm-yy
Coastal Change Adaptation Plans
Adaptation benchmarking
But resources not identified to take action.
Implement a programme of adaptation actions.
Adopt an adaptive management cycle for adaptation planning.
Description
Page 191

Page 192

Capability: Organisation Culture and Resources
For adaptation to be successful, it must be supported by your organisational culture and be sufficiently resourced.
By developing this capability you will find ways to align adaptation activities with your organisation’s priorities.
Over time they will become mainstreamed into plans, policies and procedures – becoming part of business-as-usual for your organisation.
Capability Score
Your Capability Score is an overall score for this capability, calculated automatically based on your scoring of each of the four maturity stages below.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Score (0-4) 0.67 1.67
Maturity Stage 1: Starting
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation is able to communicate why adaptation matters by linking it to your strategic objectives.
You have considered where adaptation fits in your organisation and identified key opportunities to begin your adaptation work – as well as what resources are available to support it.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Partly Mostly
Score 1 2
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 1: Starting)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify AssessmentDescription
Page 192

Page 193

Capability: Organisation Culture and Resources
OC1A Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Benchmarking report
Climate Change Strategy Update and annual reports
(considered yes, but primarily in climate change reports).
Referenced in the Corporate Plan
OC1B Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Benchmarking report.
Corporate acknowledgement of limited financial resource to deal
with extreme weather etc
Asset management group discuss expected increase in costs to
maintain assets.
Some resourcing at service level, most often for other
workstreams where adaptation is a co-benefit but more directly for
extreme weather preparedness and service continuity.
OC1C Complete dd-mmm-yy Climate change governance structure
Benchmarking working group (flexible attendance)
Consider how adaptation fits with your organisation's objectives.
Identify resources already available for adaptation.
Identify key internal stakeholders for adaptation.
Page 193

Page 194

Capability: Organisation Culture and Resources
Maturity Stage 2: Intermediate
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation now has governance arrangements in place to deliver adaptation, and you have taken steps to understand the resource requirement for initial adaptation actions.
You are engaging with colleagues to identify opportunities to include adaptation in plans, policies and procedures.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Partly Mostly
Score 1 2
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 2: Intermediate)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify Assessment
OC2A Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Cross-service collaboration, mainly on nature based solutions, e.g.
Moray Climate Ready Schools
Moray Just Transition proposal
Coastal adaptation case studies
OC2B Not started dd-mmm-yy
No additional resource needs identified at corporate level
Some services (particularly those relating to physical infrastructure
or services) and individual workstreams (biodiversity, coastal
adaptation) have defined needs. But budgets extremely limited,
hindering preparedness and forward planning
OC2C Complete dd-mmm-yy Climate change governance structure
Description
Engage with colleagues to optimise adaptation opportunities.
Define resource requirements to plan and deliver adaptation.
Establish governance arrangements for adaptation.
Page 194

Page 195

Capability: Organisation Culture and Resources
Maturity Stage 3: Advanced
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation now has defined roles, responsibilities, and governance arrangements in place to deliver adaptation.
There is an emerging set of people in your organisation who can see opportunities to deliver adaptation.
You are developing an investment plan to mobilise additional resources to support your adaptation plans.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Not at all Partly
Score 0 1
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 3: Advanced)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify Assessment
OC3A Ongoing dd-mmm-yy Benchmarking process
OC3B Not started dd-mmm-yyDevelop an investment plan to mobilise resources for adaptation.
Description
Ensure key people are responsible for adaptation actions.
Page 195

Page 196

Capability: Organisation Culture and Resources
Maturity Stage 4: Mature
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation has secured and allocated the resources required to deliver a broad range of action on adaptation.
Your governance arrangements are kept up-to-date and are able to reflect changing demands as more people become involved.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Not at all Not at all
Score 0 0
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 4: Mature)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify Assessment
OC4A Not started dd-mmm-yy
Description
Review and update governance arrangements for adaptation.
Page 196

Page 197

Capability: Working Together
No organisation can adapt alone, by working together we can do more to achieve shared adaptation outcomes.
By developing this capability you will forge connections with key partners to share ideas and find opportunities to collaborate.
You will benefit from engaging a diverse range of partners to help shape your adaptation plans.
Capability Score
Your Capability Score is an overall score for this capability, calculated automatically based on your scoring of each of the four maturity stages below.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Score (0-4) 1.33 1.33
Maturity Stage 1: Starting
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation is beginning to forge connections with others working on adaptation.
You are becoming active in relevant networks to share learning and expertise.
You are also identifying opportunities to consider adaptation in other groups, partnerships and forums.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Fully Fully
Score 3 3
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 1: Starting)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify AssessmentDescription
Page 197

Page 198

Capability: Working Together
WT1A Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Initial opportunities identified in the 2023 'climate readiness' report
that accompanied the benchmarking assessment
Area wide climate and nature partnership plan currently in
development.
WT1B Ongoing dd-mmm-yy Key groups identified in 2023 benchmarking assessment.
WT1C Complete dd-mmm-yy Member of Public Sector Climate Adaptation Network, Sustainale
Scotland Network, local authority flood resilience networks.
Define your objectives and opportunities for joined up working.
Identify relevant groups, partnerships and forums.
Join / participate in relevant professional and adaptation networks.
Page 198

Page 199

Capability: Working Together
Maturity Stage 2: Intermediate
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation is deepening its connection with partners on adaptation.
You are taking opportunities to include adaptation in a range of your organisation’s external activities, including co-delivery of initial actions.
Together you are emphasising the importance of collective action.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Partly Partly
Score 1 1
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 2: Intermediate)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify Assessment
WT2A Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Collaborating with Moray CAN to develop an area wide
partnership plan. Engagement with stakeholders is ongoing.
Project level collaboration with partners includes coastal change
adaptation case studies, community resilience groups, Moray
Nature Network and Moray climate ready schools project
WT2B Ongoing dd-mmm-yy
Groundwork has been laid for this through the work with Moray
CAN, but no adaptation-focused meeting held yet.
Collaboration with Aberdeenshire and Aberdeen City to produce a
regional climate change risk assessment has recently
commenced, to be enabled by Scot Gov regional adaptation
Co-ordinate with partners to deliver initial actions.
Description
Engage with relevant groups, partnerships and forums.
Page 199

Page 200

Capability: Working Together
Maturity Stage 3: Advanced
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation is working with partners on a regular basis to deliver a range of shared adaptation actions.
Collaboration is supported by formalising partnership arrangements and you are actively seeking to involve diverse stakeholders in your adaptation planning.
You are linking to wider networks to share ideas, experience and seek opportunities to collaborate.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Not at all Not at all
Score 0 0
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 3: Advanced)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify Assessment
WT3A Ongoing dd-mmm-yy Early stages of this with Moray CAN and area-wide partnership
plan / strategy
WT3B Not started dd-mmm-yy
Description
Formalise partnership working.
Develop communication activities with partners.
Page 200

Page 201

Capability: Working Together
Maturity Stage 4: Mature
Scoring
How closely does your organisation align with these statements?
Your organisation is working in partnership to undertake a programme of action that achieves long-term adaptation outcomes.
Partnership arrangements are maintained and refreshed so that they remain effective.
You are now a leader on adaptation and supporting others to progress.
Annually 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Descriptor Not at all Not at all
Score 0 0
Task Progress (Maturity Stage 4: Mature)
Indicate task progress and provide evidence notes below. If the task is not relevant to your organisation choose "Not relevant"
Task Code Task
Progress
Start Date
(Optional) Evidence To Justify Assessment
WT4A Not started dd-mmm-yy
WT4B Not started dd-mmm-yy
Description
Enhance long-term partnership working.
Lead in networks and peer organisations.
Page 201

Page 202

Overview - Capabilities
Maturity Stage Scores For Current Year: 2025
This graph shows your organisation’s alignment to the statements provided at each maturity stage.
Scores range from 0 to 4, where 0 represents no alignment, and a score of 4 means your organisation fully aligns with the statements.
Maturity stage Starting Intermediate Advanced Mature
Understanding the Challenge 3 1 1 0
Organisational Culture and Resources 2 2 1 0
Strategy, Implementation and
Monitoring 2 1 1 0
Working Together 3 1 0 0
Capability by year
This graph shows your organisation’s overall annual score for each capability.
Capability Scores are calculated automatically, based your Maturity Stage Scores for each Capability.
The maximum Capability Score is ‘4’, which means the organisation can be described as ‘Mature’.
Capability 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Understanding the Challenge 1.00 1.67
Organisational Culture and Resources 0.67 1.67
Strategy, Implementation and
Monitoring 0.67 1.33
Working Together 1.33 1.33
0
1
2
3
4
2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Capability scores by year
Understanding the Challenge Organisational Culture and Resources Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring Working Together
0
1
2
3
4
Understanding the Challenge Organisational Culture and Resources Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring Working Together
Starting Intermediate Advanced Mature
Page 202

Page 203

Overview - Tasks
Understanding the Challenge Key
Starting Intermediate Advanced Mature s Unknown
UC1A a
Learn about Scotland's
changing climate and
impacts.
UC2A q
Map out how your
organisation's functions
might be affected by
climate change.
UC3A r Carry out climate change
risk assessment. UC4A r Undertake project-level
risk assessment. x Not relevant
UC1B q
Develop understanding of
climate risk and
vulnerability.
UC2B r
Consider scenarios for
future climate change
impacts.
UC3B q
Integrate climate
adaptation knowledge into
internal training and
procedures.
UC4B r Mainstream climate
change risk assessment. r Not started
UC1C a
Record and consider the
impact of recent weather
events on your
organisation.
UC2C q
Engage with stakeholders
using participatory
approaches.
UC3C r Improve understanding of
stakeholder needs. UC4C r
Identify knowledge gaps,
seek expertise and foster
links with research and
innovation.
q Ongoing
a Complete
Organisational Culture and Resources
Starting Intermediate Advanced Mature
OC1A q
Consider how adaptation
fits with your
organisation's objectives.
OC2A q
Engage with colleagues to
optimise adaptation
opportunities.
OC3A q
Ensure key people are
responsible for adaptation
actions.
OC4A r
Review and update
governance arrangements
for adaptation.
OC1B q Identify resources already
available for adaptation. OC2B r
Define resource
requirements to plan and
deliver adaptation.
OC3B r
Develop an investment
plan to mobilise resources
for adaptation.
OC4B r Secure resources to plan
and deliver adaptation.
OC1C a
Identify key internal
stakeholders for
adaptation.
OC2C a
Establish governance
arrangements for
adaptation.
Change palette on cover sheet.
Page 203

Page 204

Overview - Tasks
Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring
Starting Intermediate Advanced Mature
SIM1A a
Consider how you
contribute to Scotland's
adaptation outcomes.
SIM2A q
Identify a range of
potential adaptation
actions.
SIM3A r Appraise adaptation
options. SIM4A r Implement a programme
of adaptation actions.
SIM1B q
Identify existing
adaptation work within
your organisation.
SIM2B q
Identify plans, policies and
procedures that can
include climate
adaptation.
SIM3B r Develop an adaptation
strategy and action plan. SIM4B r
Adopt an adaptive
management cycle for
adaptation planning.
SIM1C q
Define strategic
adaptation outcomes
and/or vision.
SIM2C q Deliver initial adaptation
actions. SIM3C q
Develop a monitoring
approach for achieving
your adaptation outcomes.
Working Together
Starting Intermediate Advanced Mature
WT1A q
Define your objectives and
opportunities for joined up
working.
WT2A q
Engage with relevant
groups, partnerships and
forums.
WT3A q Formalise partnership
working. WT4A r Enhance long-term
partnership working.
WT1B q Identify relevant groups,
partnerships and forums. WT2B q Co-ordinate with partners
to deliver initial actions. WT3B r Develop communication
activities with partners. WT4B r Lead in networks and peer
organisations.
WT1C a
Join / participate in
relevant professional and 
adaptation networks.
Navigation links
Go to Cover Sheet
Back to top of this page
Next sheet - Next Tasks
Previous sheet - Overview - Capabilities
Page 204

Page 205

Next Tasks
Priority Ongoing Tasks To Complete
Capability Task code Task description Task maturity stage
Understanding the Challenge UC1B Develop understanding of climate risk and vulnerability. Starting
Organisational Culture and Resources OC1A Consider how adaptation fits with your organisation's objectives. Starting
Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring SIM1B Identify existing adaptation work within your organisation. Starting
Working Together WT1A Define your objectives and opportunities for joined up working. Starting
Priority Tasks To Start
Capability Code Task description Task maturity stage
Understanding the Challenge UC2B Consider scenarios for future climate change impacts. Intermediate
Organisational Culture and Resources OC2B Define resource requirements to plan and deliver adaptation. Intermediate
Strategy, Implementation and Monitoring SIM3A Appraise adaptation options. Advanced
Working Together WT3B Develop communication activities with partners. Advanced
Page 205

Page 206

Page 206

Page 207

Report to: Economic Development
and Infrastructure
Services Committee 
Meeting
Date:
16 June 2026  
Report by: Executive Director for Economy, Enterprise and Operations      
Author: Danny Henderson,
Asset Manager
(Commercial
Properties) 
Contact
Email:
danny.henderson@moray.gov.uk 
Subject: List Of Property Transactions Concluded Under Delegated Powers 
1. PURPOSE 
☐ For Decision      ☒  For Information 
1.1 This report is submitted to the Economic Development and Infrastructure
Services Committee in terms of Section III F (5) of the Council’s Scheme of
Administration relating to industrial and commercial development. 
2. SUMMARY  
2.1 The purpose of this report is to inform the Committee of property transactions
which have been dealt with under delegated powers. 
3. BACKGROUND AND CONTEXT  
3.1 In terms of the Council’s Scheme of Delegation, the Head of Housing and
Property has delegated authority to conduct rent reviews and fix new rents.  
3.2 In terms of the Council’s Scheme of Delegation, the Head of Housing and
Property has delegated authority to grant assignations of existing leases where
the terms of lease remain substantially unaltered and to authorise sub-lets.  
3.3 In terms of the Council’s Scheme of Delegation, the Head of Housing and
Property has delegated authority to grant leases, licenses or other occupation
agreements of land and buildings for 25 years or less duration where the initial
Page 207

Page 208

rent does not exceed £35,000 per annum and sites on long term building
leases of up to 125 years duration where the initial rent does not exceed
£35,000 per annum. 
4. PROPOSALS  
4.1 APPENDIX 1 – rent reviews  
4.2 APPENDIX II – assignations  
4.3 APPENDIX III – leases 
5. SUMMARY OF IMPLICATIONS  
5.1 The table below shows whether risks and implications apply if the
recommendations are agreed: 
SUBJECT YES NO
Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcome Improvement Plan) ✓ 
Policy and Legal  ✓
Financial ✓ 
Risk  ✓
Staffing  ✓
Best Value and Transformation  ✓
Property  ✓
Information Communications Technology/Digital  ✓
Equalities. Social Inclusion and Economic Impact   ✓
Climate Change, Biodiversity and Sustainability  ✓ 
5.2 Corporate Plan and 10 Year Plan (Local Outcomes Improvement Plan
(LOIP))
Improved Collaborative Leadership, as part of continuous improvement
through Best Value, will better enable the Council to fulfil the ambitions set
out in its strategic plans. 
a) Links to Council Corporate Plan – The proposals in this report support and
contribute to improved outcomes for communities as outlined in the
following Council Plan strategic priorities:
☐ Tackle Poverty and Inequality.
☒ Build Stronger Greener Vibrant Economy.
☐ Build Thriving, resilient, empowered Communities.   
b) Links to Local Outcomes Improvement Plan – The proposals in this report
support and contribute to improved outcomes for communities as
outlined in the following local Outcomes Improvement Plan priorities:
☒ Developing a diverse, inclusive, and sustainable economy
Page 208

Page 209

☐ Building a better future for our children and young people in
Moray.
☐ Empowering and connecting communities.
☐ Improving wellbeing of our population   
5.3 Policy and Legal 
None.  
5.4 Financial 
The transactions detailed in APPENDICES I and III will generate an income to
the Council. 
One off Costs:
Service
Area
Budget Budget
Years
Proposed
Spend this
Year
Virement
From
Other
Comments       
Annually Recurring Costs:
Service
Area
Budget With
Effect
From
Annual
Net
Impact
Virement
From (if
applicable)
Other
Comments       
5.5 Risk 
None.  
5.6 Staffing 
None.  
5.7 Best Value and Transformation 
None.  
5.8 Property 
None.  
5.9 Information Communications/Technology/Digital 
None.  
5.10 Equalities, Social Inclusion and Economic Impact 
None.  
5.11 Climate Change and Biodiversity Impacts 
None. 
Page 209

Page 210

6. CONSULTATION  
6.1 None. 
7. BACKGROUND PAPERS  
7.1 None.   
Page 210

Page 211

APPENDIX I
REPORT TO THE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT AND INFRASTRUCTURE SERVICES COMMITTEE ON 16 JUNE 2026 
LIST OF RENT REVIEWS OF BUILDINGS AND SITES - SUBMITTED FOR NOTING 
1. Ref No.
2. Valuer’s Ints.
1. Address
2. Tenant
1. Building (m²) 
2. Site (Ha)
1. Date of Entry
2. Review Period
Interval
1. Previous Rent
2. New Rent
Remarks
1. FR/1/209 
2. AGREIG
1. Unit 12 Greshop Road,
Forres 
2. Stephen Duncan
1. 85sqm 
2. 0.01Ha
1. 1/10/19 
2. 3 years
1. £7,300 p.a. 
2. £7,950 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Maintenance, repair and
storage of vehicles.
1. FR/2/202 
2. AGREIG
1. 5 Greshop Road, Forres 
2. Caledonia Hosiery Ltd
1. 132sqm 
2. 0.02Ha
1. 1/11/19 
2. 3 years
1. £11,000 p.a. 
2. £12,000 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Workshop and store for a
clothing manufacturing
company.
1. EL/1/137 
2. SADEWO
1. 5 Chanonry Road North,
Elgin 
2. ESL Investments Ltd
SC556361
1. - 
2. 0.56Ha
1. 1/12/20 
2. 5 years
1. £19,200 p.a. 
2. £24,500 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Development for general
storage and distribution
and general industrial.
1. EL/1/205 
2. SADEWO
1. 7 Chanonry Spur, Elgin 
2. Moycroft Contracting Ltd
1. 85.47sqm 
2. -
1. 15/1/05 
2. 3 years
1. £6,900 p.a. 
2. £7,600 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Use classes 4, 5 & 6 of T &
CP (Use Classes)(S) Order
1997 as amended.
Page 211

Page 212

1. EL/8/130 
2. SADEWO
1. Unit 30 Tyock Industrial
Estate, Elgin 
2. JNK Kitchen Studios Ltd
1. - 
2. 0.13Ha
1. 1/11/80 
2. 5 years
1. £4,200 p.a. 
2. £5,000 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Building services
contractor and uses
ancillary thereto.
1. EL/5/125 
2. SADEWO
1. 20-22 Pinefield Parade, Elgin 
2. Trustees of The Milne
Pension Plan
1. - 
2. 0.12Ha
1. 6/1/94 
2. 5 years
1. £4,000 p.a. 
2. £4,200 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Use as a motor vehicle
body repair workshop in
connection with tenant’s
business.
1. EL/1/202 
2. SADEWO
1. 4 Chanonry Spur, Elgin 
2. Chanonry MOT Centre Ltd
1. 96sqm 
2. 0.01Ha
1. 16/10/19 
2. 3 years
1. £7,500 p.a. 
2. £8,500 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Vehicle repair and MOT
garage.
1. EL/7/102 
2. SADEWO
1. Site 1 Moycroft Road, Elgin 
2. Environmental Protection
Department
1. - 
2. 0.24Ha
1. 1/2/06 
2. 5 years
1. £10,100 p.a. 
2. £12,000 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Civic amenity site.
1. KE/1/203 
2. SADEWO
1. 3 Westerton Road South,
Keith 
2. Gordon Duncan Ltd
1. 65sqm 
2. 0.01Ha
1. 20/8/10 
2. 3 years
1. £4,100 p.a. 
2. £4,920 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Light haulage storage/
warehouse.
1. EL/8/134 
2. SADEWO
1. Unit 34 Tyock Industrial
Estate, Elgin 
2. Mr & Mrs A Stewart
1. - 
2. 0.1Ha
1. 16/11/95 
2. 5 years
1. £3,700 p.a. 
2. £4,200 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Workshop and offices
only.
Page 212

Page 213

1. EL/1/127 
2. SADEWO
1. 12 Chanonry Street, Elgin 
2. Keith James Wishart
1. - 
2. 0.1Ha
1. 23/1/01 
2. 5 years
1. £3,700 p.a. 
2. £4,300 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Motor vehicle repair
workshop and MOT testing
station.
1. EL/5/262 
2. SADEWO
1. 4 Pinefield Parade, Elgin 
2. APF Heating and Mechanical
Services Ltd
1. - 
2. 0.05Ha
1. 1/9/15 
2. 
1. £1,900 p.a. 
2. £3,170 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Workshop and storage
accommodation.
1. EL/5/103 
2. SADEWO
1. 2 Parade Spur North, Elgin 
2. Keith Paterson
1. - 
2. 0.03Ha
1. 6/9/85 
2. 5 years
1. £700 p.a. 
2. £985 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Workshop and store in
connection with tenant’s
business as joiners.
1. EL/5/256 
2. SADEWO
1. 9 Perimeter Road, Elgin 
2. Elgin Miniature Rifle Club
1. 214sqm 
2. 0.05Ha
1. 1/12/01 
2. 3 years
1. £3,250 p.a. 
2. £3,700 p.a.
Permitted Use:
To be used in furtherance
of tenant’s objects.
1. EL/5/272 
2. SADEWO
1. Yard at rear of Unit F
Pinefield Business Centre,
Elgin 
2. Oakwood Bathrooms Ltd
(SC503493)
1. - 
2. 
1. 1/12/16 
2. 3 years
1. £350 p.a. 
2. £400 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Storage of skip and
materials associated with
tenant’s bathroom
installation business.
1. BD/1/202 
2. AGREIG
1. Unit 3 Burghead Harbour,
Burghead 
2. David Erker
1. 65sqm 
2. 0.02Ha
1. 24/6/19 
2. 3 years
1. £4,330 p.a. 
2. £4,800 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Light metal fabrication
and engineering.
Page 213

Page 214

1. BK/1/115 
2. AGREIG
1. 15 March Road East, Buckie 
2. Cargill Removals
1. - 
2. 0.17Ha
1. 16/2/23 
2. 3 years
1. £5,500 p.a. 
2. £6,100 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Storage facility in
association with tenant’s
furniture removals
business.
1. BK/750/91 
2. AGREIG
1. 28 Commercial Road,
Buckie 
2. Ocean Winds UK Ltd (No
07101190)
1. - 
2. 0.31Ha
1. 5/1/23 
2. Annually
1. £33,480 p.a. 
2. £34,670 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Depot for offshore
windfarm with offices and
car park.
1. BD/1/204 
2. AGREIG
1. Unit 4 Burghead Harbour,
Burghead 
2. Stuart Roberts
1. 58sqm 
2. -
1. 6/4/23 
2. 3 years
1. £4,250 p.a. 
2. £4,250 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Car valeting and
associated storage.
Tenant previously paid 3
years upfront.  Invoicing
restarting from 6/4/26 but
no evidence to support
uplift.
1. HN/750/2 
2. AGREIG
1. Store 2 Hopeman Harbour,
Hopeman 
2. Trevor Smith
1. 49sqm 
2. -
1. 18/11/04 
2. 3 years
1. £1,250 p.a. 
2. £1,950 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Joiner’s store.
1. BK/3/100 
2. AGREIG
1. Old Station Yard, Buckie 
2. Eat Mair Fish Ltd
1. - 
2. 0.07Ha
1. 1/1/81 
2. 5 years
1. £1,675 p.a. 
2. £1,800 p.a.
Permitted Use:
Fish processing and
retailing only.  
Page 214

Page 215

APPENDIX II 
REPORT TO THE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT AND INFRASTRUCTURE SERVICES COMMITTEE ON 16 JUNE 2026 
LIST OF ASSIGNATIONS OF SITES/UNITS - SUBMITTED FOR NOTING 
1. Ref No
2. Valuer’s Ints
1. Assignor
2. Assignee
Address Lease Details Remarks
1. FR/3/102 
2. AGREIG
1. George Smith 
2. SSDO Properties Ltd
5 Waterford Way
Forres
IV36 3EE
Lease Commenced
11/5/90
Lease Term
99(Y), 0(M), 0(D)
Rental
£1,850 p.a. 
Permitted Use:
Premises for a timber
buildings manufacturing
business. 
Page 215

Page 216

APPENDIX III
REPORT TO THE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT AND INFRASTRUCTURE SERVICES COMMITTEE ON 16 JUNE 2026 
LIST OF LEASES OF BUILDINGS AND SITES – SUBMITTED FOR NOTING 
1. Reference No. 
2. Officer’s Ints
1. Address 
2. Tenant
1. Building (m²) 
2. Site (Ha) 
1. Date of Entry 
2. Review Period
Rent
(per annum)
Remarks
1. EL/1/216 
2. SADEWO
1. 10 Chanonry Road North,
Elgin 
2. R & D Engineering Ltd
1. 110sqm 
2. 0.01Ha
1. 25/9/25 
2. 3 years
£10,600 Permitted Use:  Workshop/
storage.
1. MO/1/102 
2. AGREIG
1. 1 Mosstodloch Industrial
Estate, Mosstodloch 
2. Housing DLO
1. - 
2. 0.35Ha
1. 1/4/25 
2. 3 years
£120,000 p.a. Permitted Use:  Office and
workshop. 
Page 216